1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Note Note
211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
212 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
213 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
226 \begin_layout Standard
227 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
228 LatexCommand tableofcontents
235 \begin_layout Chapter
239 \begin_layout Section
240 What is \SpecialChar LyX
244 \begin_layout Standard
246 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
247 \begin_inset Note Note
250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
252 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
253 Document Notes and Questions
256 \begin_layout Itemize
258 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
259 The menu selection Navigate
261 \SpecialChar menuseparator
264 Bookmarks does not appear to work as described
267 \begin_layout Itemize
269 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
270 Would love to see some kind of diagram showing how classes, modules, layouts,
271 or whatever else all relate.
272 It is not clear how all of these things work together.
275 \begin_layout Itemize
277 \change_inserted 5863208 1598113909
278 Change tracking does not appear to work in equations
286 is a document preparation system.
287 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
288 scripts, publishable books, business
289 letters and proposals,
290 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
294 It is unlike most other
295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
302 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
304 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
320 pt type, left justified, 5
321 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
330 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
334 \begin_layout Standard
335 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
340 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
344 \begin_layout Standard
349 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
350 's philosophy: most importantly,
351 the format of all of the manuals.
352 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
353 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
354 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
357 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
364 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
366 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
367 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
373 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
374 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
376 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
377 only a vertical scrollbar.
380 \begin_layout Standard
381 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
382 The first case is large images.
383 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
384 the image and use the option
395 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
398 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
401 \begin_layout Standard
402 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
403 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
411 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
418 \begin_layout Section
422 \begin_layout Standard
423 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
425 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
427 Just select the manual you want to read from the
434 \begin_layout Section
435 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
439 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
446 \begin_layout Standard
447 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
448 can be configured via the menu
450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
454 \begin_inset Index idx
457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
464 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
467 packages are available.
468 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
470 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
471 was installed on your system,
472 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
477 \begin_inset space \space{}
480 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
481 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
483 To force \SpecialChar LyX
484 to re-inspect your system use
486 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 \begin_inset Index idx
493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
494 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
500 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
501 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
504 \begin_layout Section
507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
509 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
516 \begin_layout Standard
517 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
518 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 installed but you will not be
521 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
522 or print your documents
526 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
527 Some \SpecialChar LyX
528 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
537 which can produce PDFs and the like.
540 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
542 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
545 every \SpecialChar LyX
546 document can still be output as plain text
547 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
553 \begin_layout Standard
554 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
556 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
560 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
561 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
564 \begin_layout Standard
565 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
566 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
567 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
570 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
578 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
579 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
582 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
586 \begin_inset Index idx
589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
590 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
598 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
605 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
609 \begin_layout Chapter
610 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
614 \begin_layout Section
615 Basic File Operations
616 \begin_inset Index idx
619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
628 \begin_layout Standard
633 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
634 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
637 \begin_layout Itemize
659 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-new-template"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
715 \begin_layout Itemize
717 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
729 \begin_layout Itemize
741 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
745 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
755 \begin_layout Itemize
777 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
815 \begin_layout Itemize
829 \begin_layout Itemize
843 \begin_layout Standard
844 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
845 few minor differences.
848 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
859 command lists the available templates.
860 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
862 and possibly propose text fragments
864 for the document, features
865 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
868 you would otherwise need to
869 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
871 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
875 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
879 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
887 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
893 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
894 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
898 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
939 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
940 to open a file or create a new one, that big
941 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
945 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
949 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
960 \begin_layout Standard
982 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
984 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
987 people work on the same document at the same time.
991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
992 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
995 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1000 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1001 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1003 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1005 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1010 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1011 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1020 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1025 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1033 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1044 \begin_inset space ~
1048 \begin_inset space ~
1053 will reload the document from disk.
1054 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1055 and want to restore it to the last save
1056 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1063 \begin_inset space ~
1068 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1069 them as your changes.
1072 \begin_layout Section
1073 Basic Editing Features
1074 \begin_inset Index idx
1077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1084 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1086 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1093 \begin_layout Standard
1094 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1095 can perform cut and paste operations
1096 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1097 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1098 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1099 editing features and how to access
1101 We will start with cut and paste.
1104 \begin_layout Standard
1105 As you might expect, the
1109 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1110 various other editing features.
1111 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1115 \begin_layout Itemize
1121 \begin_inset Index idx
1124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 \begin_layout Itemize
1159 \begin_inset Index idx
1162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1191 \begin_layout Itemize
1197 \begin_inset Index idx
1200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1225 \begin_layout Itemize
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1235 \begin_layout Itemize
1239 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_layout Itemize
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset Index idx
1262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1271 \begin_inset Index idx
1274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1289 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1299 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1305 \begin_layout Standard
1306 The first three are self-explanatory.
1307 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1308 and other programs using
1329 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1330 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1335 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1336 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1337 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1338 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1339 into individual cells.
1343 \begin_inset space ~
1348 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1349 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1353 \begin_layout Standard
1357 \begin_inset space ~
1362 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1364 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1366 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1379 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1380 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1381 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1387 \begin_inset space \space{}
1390 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1391 text which is often meaningless.)
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1398 \begin_inset space ~
1401 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1403 \begin_inset space ~
1407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1411 \begin_inset space ~
1420 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1421 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1422 is inserted as one paragraph.
1423 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1427 \begin_inset space ~
1432 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1433 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1439 \begin_inset space ~
1442 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1448 \begin_inset space ~
1456 \begin_inset space ~
1459 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1462 paste from the primary selection.
1463 This is normally the currently selected text.
1466 \begin_layout Standard
1469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1471 \begin_inset space ~
1475 \begin_inset space ~
1483 \begin_inset space ~
1487 \begin_inset space ~
1493 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1499 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1502 \begin_inset space ~
1511 \begin_inset space ~
1516 button to skip the curren
1517 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1521 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1528 \begin_inset space ~
1533 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1537 \begin_inset space ~
1542 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1544 If the toggle is set, searching for
1545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1556 will not match the word
1557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1571 Match whole words only
1573 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1574 to only find complete words, e.
1575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1579 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1608 also offers an advanced
1611 \begin_inset space ~
1615 \begin_inset space ~
1620 feature that is described in section
1621 \begin_inset space ~
1625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1627 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1634 \begin_layout Standard
1635 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1636 \begin_inset space \space{}
1640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1648 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1650 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1655 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1666 arg "inset-select-all"
1669 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1670 When the cursor is inside an inset
1673 arg "inset-select-all"
1676 selects the content of the inset.
1680 arg "inset-select-all"
1683 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1684 then to the whole document.
1688 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1691 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1695 \begin_layout Section
1697 \begin_inset Index idx
1700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1707 \begin_inset Index idx
1710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1719 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1727 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1729 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1732 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1735 or the toolbar button
1742 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1744 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1747 or the toolbar button
1754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1761 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1762 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1765 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1778 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1779 This is a consequence of the 100
1780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1783 step undo limit mentioned above.
1786 \begin_layout Standard
1795 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1797 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1801 \begin_layout Section
1803 \begin_inset Index idx
1806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1815 \begin_layout Standard
1816 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1819 \begin_layout Enumerate
1824 \begin_layout Itemize
1829 once anywhere in the edit window.
1830 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1834 \begin_layout Enumerate
1839 \begin_layout Itemize
1846 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1849 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1852 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1853 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1855 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1856 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1862 \begin_layout Itemize
1863 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1873 \begin_layout Enumerate
1874 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1878 \begin_layout Standard
1879 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1880 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1884 \begin_layout Section
1886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1888 name "sec:Navigating"
1893 \begin_inset Index idx
1896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1905 \begin_layout Standard
1907 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1910 \begin_layout Itemize
1915 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1916 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1919 \begin_layout Itemize
1920 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1922 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1924 \begin_inset space ~
1929 or by the toolbar button
1932 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1938 \begin_layout Itemize
1939 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1941 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1944 and use the same menu to return to them.
1945 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1952 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1957 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1958 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1960 \begin_inset space ~
1965 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1966 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1967 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1968 last editing position.
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1976 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Subsection
1982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1984 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1989 \begin_inset Index idx
1992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 Navigating ! Outline
1999 \begin_inset Index idx
2002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_layout Standard
2012 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2013 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2014 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2015 \begin_inset space ~
2019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2021 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2025 ), notes, or citations (see section
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2037 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2041 \begin_layout Standard
2042 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2043 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2044 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2045 dialog and to modify the citation.
2048 \begin_layout Standard
2053 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2054 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2056 Labels and References
2058 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2067 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2070 \begin_layout Standard
2071 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2072 control the display.
2077 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2078 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2083 option keeps it in the current view state.
2084 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2085 \begin_inset space ~
2088 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2089 \begin_inset space ~
2092 3, the subsections of sections
2093 \begin_inset space ~
2096 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2101 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2102 \begin_inset space ~
2106 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2116 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2119 \begin_layout Standard
2126 button refreshes the TOC (
2127 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2129 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2133 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2135 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2139 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2153 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2157 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2165 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2169 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2173 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2175 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2179 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2183 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2187 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2191 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2195 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2199 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2203 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2207 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2209 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2213 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2227 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2228 For example, you can move section
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2236 2.4 or after section
2237 \begin_inset space ~
2242 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2255 (or the corresponding key bindings
2263 ) you can change the level of sections.
2264 You can make section
2265 \begin_inset space ~
2269 \begin_inset space ~
2273 \begin_inset space ~
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2281 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2284 \begin_layout Subsection
2285 Horizontal Scrolling
2286 \begin_inset Index idx
2289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2290 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2298 \begin_layout Standard
2300 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2305 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2306 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2307 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2311 \begin_layout Standard
2312 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2316 \begin_layout Itemize
2318 is used on a small tablet computer
2321 \begin_layout Itemize
2322 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2334 \begin_inset space ~
2347 \begin_layout Itemize
2348 Math constructs with long command names
2351 \begin_layout Standard
2352 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2353 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2355 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2356 window so that table
2357 \begin_inset space ~
2361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2363 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2368 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2370 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2371 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2374 \begin_layout Standard
2375 \begin_inset Float table
2382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2383 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2388 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2392 Horizontal scrolling test.
2400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2402 \begin_inset Tabular
2403 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2404 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2405 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2449 \begin_layout Section
2450 Input/Word Completion
2451 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2453 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2458 \begin_inset Index idx
2461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2468 \begin_inset Index idx
2471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2502 \begin_layout Standard
2504 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2506 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2507 is used to propose completions.
2510 \begin_layout Standard
2511 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2514 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2519 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2526 \begin_inset space ~
2530 \begin_inset space ~
2535 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2539 \begin_inset space ~
2544 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2545 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2555 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2556 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2557 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2558 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2561 \begin_layout Standard
2563 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2564 completions available.
2569 key to accept a proposed completion.
2570 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2571 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2572 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2575 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2582 \begin_layout Standard
2583 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2584 ing options for text.
2586 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2588 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2590 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2593 he special math option
2597 enables characters to be composed.
2599 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2601 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2605 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2608 you want to insert the character
2609 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2613 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2616 input the characters
2617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2629 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2631 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2635 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2637 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2642 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2644 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2647 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2650 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2652 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2655 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2660 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2662 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2666 's installation folder.
2668 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2669 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2676 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2681 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2682 In the example above,
2687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2719 \begin_layout Section
2721 \begin_inset Index idx
2724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_inset Index idx
2734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2763 \begin_inset Index idx
2766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2797 \begin_layout Standard
2798 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2812 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2815 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2819 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2820 \begin_inset space ~
2824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2826 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2833 \begin_layout Standard
2837 \begin_inset space ~
2845 \begin_inset space ~
2866 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2870 \begin_layout Labeling
2871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2875 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2876 LatexCommand nomenclature
2878 description "Tabulator key"
2885 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2887 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2888 \begin_inset space ~
2892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2894 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2901 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2905 , especially section
2906 \begin_inset space ~
2910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2912 reference "subsec:Lists"
2918 If you are still confused, look in the
2923 \begin_inset Newline newline
2931 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2932 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2936 \begin_layout Labeling
2937 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2941 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2942 LatexCommand nomenclature
2944 description "Escape key"
2952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2959 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2960 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2963 \begin_layout Labeling
2964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2969 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2970 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2974 \begin_layout Standard
2975 There are three modifier keys:
2978 \begin_layout Labeling
2979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2997 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2998 LatexCommand nomenclature
3000 description "Control key"
3005 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3006 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3010 \begin_layout Itemize
3019 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3022 \begin_layout Itemize
3031 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3034 \begin_layout Itemize
3043 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3047 \begin_layout Labeling
3048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3067 LatexCommand nomenclature
3069 description "Shift key"
3074 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3075 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3078 \begin_layout Labeling
3079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3097 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3098 LatexCommand nomenclature
3100 description "Alt or Meta key"
3105 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3106 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3107 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3113 \begin_inset Newline newline
3116 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3118 menu accelerator keys
3121 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3122 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3126 \begin_layout Standard
3127 For example, the sequence
3128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3134 \begin_inset space ~
3138 \begin_inset space ~
3144 \begin_inset space ~
3152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3171 \begin_inset space ~
3177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3187 \begin_layout Standard
3192 manual lists all other things bound to the
3200 \begin_layout Standard
3201 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3203 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3205 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3206 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3208 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3209 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3210 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3212 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3228 followed by a capital
3235 \begin_layout Chapter
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 \begin_layout Section
3253 \begin_inset Index idx
3256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3265 \begin_layout Subsection
3269 \begin_layout Standard
3270 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3271 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3272 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3273 numbering schemes, and so on.
3274 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3275 and format the title of your document differently.
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3283 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3284 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3285 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3286 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3287 picks one for you by default.
3288 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3291 \begin_layout Subsection
3293 \begin_inset Index idx
3296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3305 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3312 \begin_layout Standard
3313 You can select a class using the
3315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3316 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3320 \begin_inset Index idx
3323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3330 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3338 \begin_layout Standard
3339 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3344 \begin_layout Description
3345 Article for basic articles
3348 \begin_layout Description
3349 Report for basic reports
3352 \begin_layout Description
3353 Book for writing a book
3356 \begin_layout Description
3357 Letter for US-style letters
3360 \begin_layout Standard
3361 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3362 only uses if you have installed
3363 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 distributions will include
3367 Here are some of the classes.
3368 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3370 Special Document Classes
3379 \begin_layout Description
3380 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3383 \begin_layout Description
3384 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3388 \begin_layout Description
3389 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3393 \begin_layout Description
3394 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3395 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3396 There are three article layouts available.
3397 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3398 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3399 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3400 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3405 sequential numbering
3406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3409 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3410 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3411 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3412 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 Beamer Layout for presentations
3419 \begin_layout Description
3420 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3421 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3422 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3423 with \SpecialChar LyX
3427 \begin_layout Description
3428 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3431 \begin_layout Description
3433 \begin_inset space ~
3436 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3439 \begin_layout Description
3440 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3443 \begin_layout Description
3444 Foils Used to make transparencies
3447 \begin_layout Description
3448 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3449 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3450 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3451 with \SpecialChar LyX
3455 \begin_layout Description
3456 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3457 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3460 \begin_layout Description
3461 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3464 \begin_layout Description
3465 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3468 \begin_layout Description
3469 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3470 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3471 (Is used by this document.)
3474 \begin_layout Description
3475 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3478 \begin_layout Description
3479 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3482 \begin_layout Description
3487 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3488 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3490 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3494 \begin_layout Description
3495 Slides Used to make transparencies
3498 \begin_layout Description
3500 \begin_inset space ~
3503 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3504 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3507 \begin_layout Description
3508 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3511 \begin_layout Standard
3512 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3514 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3516 Special Document Classes
3523 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3524 of the document classes.
3527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3531 \begin_layout Standard
3532 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3537 \begin_inset Index idx
3540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3557 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3558 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3560 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3563 \begin_layout Standard
3566 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3571 , are highly specialized.
3573 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3574 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3575 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3576 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3577 by some document class.
3578 There are just too many of them.
3579 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3582 \begin_layout Standard
3583 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3591 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3592 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3593 document class for a new file.
3595 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3598 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3605 manual for information on how to install them.
3606 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3612 \begin_layout Standard
3613 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3614 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3615 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3616 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3617 class files to be used for dissertation
3618 s submitted to those universities.
3619 The \SpecialChar LyX
3620 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3622 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3626 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3632 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3639 name "subsec:Modules"
3644 \begin_inset Index idx
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3656 \begin_layout Standard
3657 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3658 chosen document class.
3659 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3660 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3667 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3671 \begin_inset Index idx
3674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3685 \begin_layout Standard
3686 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3687 packages or file format converters that are not always
3688 installed by default.
3690 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3691 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3692 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3693 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3695 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3696 file without the missing prerequisites.
3697 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3698 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3701 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3705 \begin_inset Index idx
3708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3709 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3716 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3720 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3724 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3733 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3735 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3746 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3749 \begin_layout Standard
3750 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3758 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3760 will advise you about these things.
3768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3770 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3772 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3777 \begin_inset Index idx
3780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 Document ! Local Layout
3789 \begin_layout Standard
3790 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3791 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3792 : They are intended to be used in
3793 a variety of different documents.
3794 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3795 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3796 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3797 need a specific inset or
3798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3800 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3803 style only that one time.
3804 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3806 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3824 manual for information on how to use it.
3827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3831 \begin_layout Standard
3832 Each class has a default set of options.
3833 Here's a quick table describing them:
3836 \begin_layout Standard
3837 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3843 \begin_layout Standard
3845 \begin_inset Tabular
3846 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3847 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3848 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3849 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3850 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3851 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 \begin_layout Standard
4307 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4313 \begin_layout Standard
4314 You're probably also wondering what
4315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4319 \begin_inset space ~
4323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4327 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4328 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4333 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4338 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4348 headings, there are also
4356 headings, and so on.
4357 We will describe these headings fully in section
4358 \begin_inset space ~
4362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4364 reference "subsec:Headings"
4371 \begin_layout Subsection
4373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4375 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4380 \begin_inset Index idx
4383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4390 \begin_inset Index idx
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4402 \begin_layout Standard
4403 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4405 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4412 \begin_inset space ~
4420 \begin_inset space ~
4425 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4427 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4428 doesn't support special options you want to
4429 use for your document.
4430 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4431 -class and its options, you have to read
4435 \begin_layout Standard
4437 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4441 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4445 \begin_inset space ~
4452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4458 \begin_inset space ~
4463 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4464 You can choose between the following five options:
4467 \begin_layout Labeling
4468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4473 Use default page style of current class.
4476 \begin_layout Labeling
4477 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4482 No page numbers or headings.
4485 \begin_layout Labeling
4486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4494 \begin_layout Labeling
4495 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4500 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4501 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4502 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4503 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4506 \begin_layout Labeling
4507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4512 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4513 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4519 \begin_inset Index idx
4522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4530 How they are defined is explained in section
4531 \begin_inset space ~
4535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4537 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4545 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4552 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4559 \begin_layout Subsection
4560 Paper Size and Orientation
4561 \begin_inset Index idx
4564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4565 Document ! Paper size
4571 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4573 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4580 \begin_layout Standard
4581 You can find the following options in the menu
4584 \begin_inset space ~
4591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset Index idx
4598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4607 \begin_layout Labeling
4608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4612 \begin_inset space ~
4617 What size paper to print on.
4622 \begin_layout Itemize
4628 \begin_layout Itemize
4634 \begin_layout Itemize
4640 \begin_layout Itemize
4646 \begin_layout Itemize
4649 US letter, US legal, US executive
4652 \begin_layout Itemize
4658 \begin_layout Itemize
4665 \begin_layout Labeling
4666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4671 To choose whether to output as
4682 \begin_layout Labeling
4683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4687 \begin_inset space ~
4692 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4693 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4696 \begin_layout Subsection
4698 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4700 name "subsec:Margins"
4705 \begin_inset Index idx
4708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4715 \begin_inset Index idx
4718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4727 \begin_layout Standard
4728 Paper margins are set in the menu
4730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4734 \begin_inset Index idx
4737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4746 \begin_layout Standard
4747 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4748 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4749 the paper format and the font size into account.
4752 \begin_layout Subsection
4756 \begin_layout Standard
4757 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4758 has to convert everything into the new
4760 That includes the paragraph environments.
4761 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4762 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4763 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4765 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4774 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4776 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4777 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4778 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4781 \begin_layout Section
4782 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4783 \begin_inset Index idx
4786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4787 Paragraph ! Indentation
4795 \begin_layout Subsection
4797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4799 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4807 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4808 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4811 \begin_layout Standard
4812 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4813 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4814 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4815 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4819 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4825 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4826 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4827 language than English.
4829 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4832 \begin_layout Standard
4833 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4834 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4835 into \SpecialChar LyX
4837 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4840 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4842 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4843 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4844 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4851 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4852 goes to produce a printable file.
4857 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4859 gives you the ability globally to change
4863 these pre-coded spacings.
4864 We will explain more later.
4867 \begin_layout Subsection
4868 Paragraph Separation
4869 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4871 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4876 \begin_inset Index idx
4879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4880 Paragraph ! Separation
4888 \begin_layout Standard
4896 \begin_inset space ~
4904 \begin_inset space ~
4911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4915 \begin_inset Index idx
4918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4924 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4927 \begin_layout Subsection
4931 \begin_layout Standard
4932 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4935 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4937 \begin_inset space ~
4942 dialog and toggle the
4945 \begin_inset space ~
4950 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4953 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4957 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4958 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4964 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4967 \begin_layout Subsection
4969 \begin_inset Index idx
4972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4973 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4984 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4988 \begin_inset Index idx
4991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5000 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5004 \begin_inset space ~
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5014 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5020 \begin_inset Index idx
5023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5030 installed to use this feature.
5035 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5037 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5039 \begin_inset space ~
5044 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5045 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5048 \begin_layout Section
5049 Paragraph Environments
5050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5052 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5057 \begin_inset Index idx
5060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5061 Paragraph ! Environments
5067 \begin_inset Index idx
5070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5071 Paragraph environments|(
5079 \begin_layout Subsection
5083 \begin_layout Standard
5084 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5087 \begin_layout Standard
5096 } \SpecialChar ldots
5106 \begin_inset Newline newline
5109 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5111 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5112 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5113 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5122 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5125 \begin_layout Standard
5126 A paragraph environment is simply a
5127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5134 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5135 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5136 scheme, labels, and so on.
5137 Additionally, you can
5138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5145 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5146 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5147 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5148 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5150 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5152 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5155 \begin_layout Standard
5156 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5157 \begin_inset Graphics
5158 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5164 at the left end of the toolbar.
5166 will change the environment of the
5170 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5171 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5172 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5175 \begin_layout Standard
5184 create a new paragraph using the
5188 paragraph environment.
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5197 because if you are in one of these environments:
5200 \begin_layout Itemize
5206 \begin_layout Itemize
5212 \begin_layout Itemize
5218 \begin_layout Itemize
5224 \begin_layout Itemize
5230 \begin_layout Itemize
5236 \begin_layout Itemize
5242 \begin_layout Standard
5244 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5248 , rather than resetting it to
5253 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5254 \begin_inset space ~
5258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5260 reference "sec:Nesting"
5267 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 \begin_layout Standard
5272 The default paragraph environment is
5277 It creates a plain paragraph.
5279 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5280 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5281 this manual) are in the
5288 \begin_layout Standard
5289 You can nest a paragraph using the
5293 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5301 \begin_layout Subsection
5303 \begin_inset Index idx
5306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5317 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5326 for thanks or contact information.
5327 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5328 places all of this on a separate page
5329 along with today's date.
5330 For other types of documents, the title
5331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5338 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5341 \begin_layout Standard
5343 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5357 Here's how you use them:
5360 \begin_layout Itemize
5361 Put the title of your document in the
5368 \begin_layout Itemize
5369 Put the author name in the
5376 \begin_layout Itemize
5377 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5378 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5384 Note that using this environment is optional.
5385 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5386 will automatically insert today's date.
5387 If you don't want a date, use the option
5389 Suppress default date on front page
5393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5396 \begin_inset space ~
5404 \begin_layout Standard
5405 You can use footnotes to insert
5406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5413 or contact information.
5416 \begin_layout Subsection
5418 \begin_inset Index idx
5421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5430 name "subsec:Headings"
5437 \begin_layout Standard
5438 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5440 takes care of the numbering for you.
5443 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5445 \begin_inset Index idx
5448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5449 Section headings ! Numbered
5457 \begin_layout Standard
5458 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5462 \begin_layout Enumerate
5468 \begin_layout Enumerate
5474 \begin_layout Enumerate
5480 \begin_layout Enumerate
5486 \begin_layout Enumerate
5492 \begin_layout Enumerate
5498 \begin_layout Enumerate
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5506 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5507 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5508 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5509 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5511 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5513 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5519 \begin_layout Standard
5520 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5521 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5522 You group the book into chapters.
5524 does a similar grouping:
5527 \begin_layout Itemize
5532 is divided into either
5543 \begin_layout Itemize
5555 \begin_layout Itemize
5567 \begin_layout Itemize
5579 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 \begin_layout Itemize
5603 \begin_layout Standard
5604 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5612 Not all document types use the
5616 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5621 is the top-level heading.
5629 \begin_layout Standard
5634 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5635 labels it with its number,
5636 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5638 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5650 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5652 \begin_inset Index idx
5655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5656 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 The unnumbered section headings have a
5666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5673 at the end of their name.
5674 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5675 the table of contents, see section
5676 \begin_inset space ~
5680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5690 Changing the Numbering
5691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5693 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5701 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5702 in the Table of Contents.
5703 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5705 Just as certain classes start with
5719 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5729 This is something you can change.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5739 \begin_inset Index idx
5742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5751 \begin_inset space ~
5755 \begin_inset space ~
5760 you will see two counters.
5765 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5766 numbers a section heading.
5767 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5772 Short Titles of Headings
5773 \begin_inset Index idx
5776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5777 Section headings ! Short titles
5783 \begin_inset Argument 1
5786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5795 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5802 \begin_layout Standard
5803 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5804 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5805 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5806 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5811 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5812 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5813 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5814 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5819 \begin_inset space ~
5825 This will insert a box labeled
5826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5830 \begin_inset space ~
5834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5837 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5838 This also works for captions inside floats.
5839 There can only be one short title per title.
5842 \begin_layout Standard
5843 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5846 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5850 \begin_layout Standard
5851 The following information applies to all section headings:
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5859 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5862 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5867 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5870 \begin_layout Subsection
5874 \begin_layout Standard
5876 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5890 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5891 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5892 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5893 the text they contain.
5894 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5902 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5905 \begin_layout Standard
5906 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5915 when you start a new paragraph.
5916 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5920 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5921 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5922 have to change back to the
5926 environment yourself.
5929 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5938 \begin_inset Index idx
5941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5950 \begin_layout Standard
5951 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5952 time for the differences.
5961 are identical except for one difference:
5965 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5974 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5977 \begin_layout Standard
5978 Here's an example of the
5991 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5993 See – no indentation!
5997 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5998 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5999 the other paragraph.
6002 \begin_layout Standard
6003 Here's another example, this time in the
6010 \begin_layout Quotation
6016 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6017 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6018 the first line, then
6022 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6026 you were quoting other text.
6029 \begin_layout Quotation
6030 Here's a new paragraph.
6031 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6032 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6035 \begin_layout Standard
6036 As the examples show,
6040 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6041 They should put quotes in the
6046 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6050 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6055 \begin_inset Index idx
6058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6065 \begin_inset Index idx
6068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6084 \begin_layout Standard
6089 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6095 \begin_inset Newline newline
6098 Which I did not rehearse!
6102 It could be much worse.
6103 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6105 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6106 indented a bit more than the first.
6107 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6113 \begin_inset Newline newline
6116 And make things look fine
6117 \begin_inset Newline newline
6123 arg "newline-insert newline"
6129 \begin_layout Standard
6134 does not indent both margins.
6135 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6136 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6139 arg "newline-insert newline"
6145 \begin_layout Subsection
6147 \begin_inset Index idx
6150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6168 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6178 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6179 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6188 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6189 lets you provide your own label.
6190 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6191 describing some general features of all four of them.
6194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6198 \begin_layout Standard
6199 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6201 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6202 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6211 reset the environment to
6215 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6216 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6217 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6221 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6225 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6233 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6234 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6235 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6237 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6238 you read all of section
6239 \begin_inset space ~
6243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6245 reference "sec:Nesting"
6252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6254 \begin_inset Index idx
6257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6264 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6274 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6278 paragraph environment.
6279 It has the following properties:
6282 \begin_layout Itemize
6283 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6287 \begin_layout Itemize
6289 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6292 \begin_layout Itemize
6293 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6297 \begin_layout Itemize
6298 The items can have any length.
6300 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6301 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6308 \begin_layout Itemize
6313 environment inside another
6317 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6321 \begin_layout Itemize
6322 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6325 \begin_layout Itemize
6327 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6330 \begin_layout Itemize
6332 \begin_inset space ~
6336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6338 reference "sec:Nesting"
6342 for a full explanation of nesting.
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6356 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6360 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6361 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6364 \begin_layout Itemize
6365 The label for the first level
6369 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6373 \begin_layout Itemize
6374 The label for the second level is a dash.
6378 \begin_layout Itemize
6379 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6383 \begin_layout Itemize
6384 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6388 \begin_layout Itemize
6389 Back out to the third level.
6393 \begin_layout Itemize
6394 Back to the second level.
6398 \begin_layout Itemize
6399 Back to the outermost level.
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 These are the default labels for an
6408 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6413 dialog in the submenu
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6427 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6431 \begin_layout Standard
6432 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6433 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6435 \begin_inset space ~
6439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6441 reference "sec:Nesting"
6448 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6450 \begin_inset Index idx
6453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6462 name "sec:Enumerate"
6469 \begin_layout Standard
6474 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6475 It has these properties:
6478 \begin_layout Enumerate
6479 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6483 \begin_layout Enumerate
6484 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6490 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6493 \begin_layout Enumerate
6498 environment resets the counter to one.
6501 \begin_layout Enumerate
6514 \begin_layout Enumerate
6515 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6516 Items can have any length.
6519 \begin_layout Enumerate
6520 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6523 \begin_layout Enumerate
6524 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6527 \begin_layout Enumerate
6528 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6532 \begin_layout Standard
6541 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6543 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6544 labels the four different levels in an
6551 \begin_layout Enumerate
6552 The first level of an
6556 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6560 \begin_layout Enumerate
6561 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6565 \begin_layout Enumerate
6566 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6570 \begin_layout Enumerate
6571 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6574 \begin_layout Enumerate
6575 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6580 \begin_layout Enumerate
6581 Back to the third level
6585 \begin_layout Enumerate
6586 Back to the second level.
6590 \begin_layout Enumerate
6591 Back to the outermost level.
6594 \begin_layout Standard
6595 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6599 environment, see section
6600 \begin_inset space ~
6604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6606 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6611 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6615 \begin_layout Standard
6616 There is more to nesting
6620 environments than we've stated here.
6621 You should read section
6622 \begin_inset space ~
6626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6628 reference "sec:Nesting"
6632 to learn more about nesting.
6635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6637 \begin_inset Index idx
6640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6649 \begin_layout Standard
6650 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6654 list has no fixed label.
6655 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6664 of the first line as the label.
6668 \begin_layout Description
6669 Example: This is an example of the
6676 \begin_layout Standard
6678 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6682 \begin_layout Standard
6684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6691 it is meant that the first usage of the
6695 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6697 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6705 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6710 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6711 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6713 \begin_inset space ~
6719 \begin_inset space ~
6723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6725 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6729 for more information.) Here is an example:
6732 \begin_layout Description
6734 \begin_inset space ~
6737 Example: This one shows how to use a
6740 \begin_inset space ~
6752 \begin_layout Description
6753 Usage: You should use the
6757 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6758 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6760 It's not a good idea to use a
6764 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6765 You're better off using
6777 paragraphs into them.
6780 \begin_layout Description
6781 Nesting: You can nest
6785 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6789 \begin_layout Standard
6790 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6791 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6792 them from the first line.
6795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6797 \begin_inset Index idx
6800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6814 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6815 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6828 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6830 Here are its properties:
6833 \begin_layout Labeling
6834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6836 \begin_inset space ~
6839 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6848 of each line as the item label.
6853 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6854 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6855 space as described above.
6858 \begin_layout Labeling
6859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6860 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6861 uses different margins for the item label and the
6862 body of the item text.
6863 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6864 label width plus a little extra space.
6867 \begin_layout Labeling
6868 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6870 \begin_inset space ~
6873 width \SpecialChar LyX
6874 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6875 If the label width is larger, the label
6876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6883 into the first line.
6884 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6885 margin of the rest of the item text.
6888 \begin_layout Labeling
6889 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6891 \begin_inset space ~
6894 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6899 environment has the same left margin.
6900 \begin_inset Newline newline
6903 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6908 \begin_inset space ~
6913 dialog (toolbar button
6916 arg "layout-paragraph"
6923 \begin_inset space ~
6928 determines the default label width.
6929 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6938 multiple times instead.
6939 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6949 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6952 \begin_inset space ~
6957 every time you alter a label in a
6962 \begin_inset Newline newline
6965 The predefined default width is the length of
6966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6974 \begin_inset space ~
6980 \begin_layout Standard
6985 list the same way as the
6989 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6995 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6999 \begin_layout Standard
7004 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7005 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7007 \begin_inset space ~
7011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7013 reference "sec:Nesting"
7017 to learn about nesting.
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7021 There is yet another feature of the
7025 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7026 left-justifies the item labels by
7028 You can use additional
7032 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7033 justifies the item label.
7038 are documented in section
7039 \begin_inset space ~
7043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7045 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7050 Here are some examples:
7053 \begin_layout Labeling
7054 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7055 Left The default for
7062 \begin_layout Labeling
7063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7064 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7071 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7074 \begin_layout Labeling
7075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7076 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7080 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7087 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7090 \begin_layout Subsection
7092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7094 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7099 \begin_inset Index idx
7102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7111 \begin_layout Standard
7112 The features described in this section require that the module
7114 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7116 is loaded in the document settings.
7117 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7123 \begin_inset Index idx
7126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7136 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7137 Custom Enumerate Lists
7138 \begin_inset Index idx
7141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7150 \begin_layout Standard
7152 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7158 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7159 There you add the command
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7170 \begin_layout Standard
7182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7184 Code, look at section
7185 \begin_inset space ~
7189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7191 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7204 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7211 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7212 For capital Roman numerals replace
7224 in the command above.
7225 For Arabic numerals use
7233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7240 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7265 You can only number 26
7266 \begin_inset space ~
7269 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7277 \begin_layout Standard
7278 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7279 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7282 \begin_layout Standard
7283 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7286 \begin_layout Enumerate
7287 \begin_inset Argument 1
7290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_inset Argument 1
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7343 \begin_layout Enumerate
7348 \begin_layout Enumerate
7349 \begin_inset Argument 1
7352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7376 \begin_layout Enumerate
7377 \begin_inset Argument 1
7380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7406 \begin_layout Standard
7407 For this list these commands were used:
7410 \begin_layout Standard
7421 \begin_inset Newline newline
7429 \begin_inset Newline newline
7437 \begin_inset Newline newline
7447 \begin_layout Standard
7454 makes the label emphasized and
7463 \begin_layout Standard
7464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7472 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7473 lists until you change the definition.
7481 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7483 \begin_inset Index idx
7486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7487 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7495 \begin_layout Standard
7496 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7499 \begin_layout Enumerate
7500 \begin_inset Argument 1
7503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7522 \begin_inset Note Note
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 goes back to default numbering
7534 \begin_layout Enumerate
7538 \begin_layout Standard
7542 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7547 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7552 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7553 to indicate that it is a resumed
7554 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7555 , but in the output.
7558 \begin_layout Standard
7559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7567 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7577 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7579 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7580 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7581 of a normal enumeration.
7582 There, insert the command
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7591 \begin_layout Standard
7596 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7600 \begin_layout Enumerate
7604 \begin_layout Enumerate
7608 \begin_layout Standard
7609 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7612 \begin_layout Enumerate
7613 \begin_inset Argument 1
7616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7632 This enumeration starts at 4
7635 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7637 \begin_inset Index idx
7640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7649 \begin_layout Standard
7650 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7652 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7655 \begin_layout Itemize
7659 \begin_layout Itemize
7660 with standard spacing
7663 \begin_layout Standard
7664 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7666 Add there the command
7670 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7673 \begin_layout Itemize
7674 \begin_inset Argument 1
7677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Itemize
7700 \begin_layout Itemize
7704 \begin_layout Standard
7705 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7712 \begin_inset Index idx
7715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7723 For more information see its documentation,
7724 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7735 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7737 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7738 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7742 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7745 \begin_layout Enumerate
7746 \begin_inset Argument 1
7749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7757 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7770 \begin_layout Enumerate
7771 with negative indentation
7774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7775 Further Customization
7776 \begin_inset Index idx
7779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7780 Lists ! Customization
7788 \begin_layout Standard
7789 You can also change the style of description lists.
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 changes the description label font, the command
7803 \begin_layout Standard
7809 \begin_layout Standard
7810 sets the list style.
7813 \begin_layout Standard
7814 An example where the command
7817 \begin_layout Standard
7822 itshape, style=nextline
7825 \begin_layout Standard
7829 \begin_layout Description
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7835 \begin_inset Argument 1
7838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7844 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7846 itshape, style=nextline
7856 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7857 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7861 \begin_layout Description
7863 \begin_inset space ~
7866 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7867 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7868 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7871 \begin_layout Standard
7872 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7878 \begin_inset Index idx
7881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 For more information see its documentation
7890 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7900 \begin_layout Subsection
7902 \begin_inset Index idx
7905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7916 \begin_inset space ~
7919 Address: An Overview
7922 \begin_layout Standard
7923 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7924 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7932 \begin_inset space ~
7938 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7939 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7940 gags on the document.
7941 In contrast, you can use the
7948 \begin_inset space ~
7953 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7954 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7958 \begin_layout Standard
7959 Of course, you're not limited to using
7966 \begin_inset space ~
7975 \begin_inset space ~
7980 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7981 some European academic papers.
7984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7988 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7995 \begin_layout Standard
8000 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8001 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8005 \begin_inset space ~
8010 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8011 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8012 Here's an example of each:
8015 \begin_layout Right Address
8017 \begin_inset Newline newline
8021 \begin_inset Newline newline
8025 \begin_inset Newline newline
8028 When is it? What is today?
8031 \begin_layout Standard
8035 \begin_inset space ~
8041 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8043 the largest block of text on a single line.
8044 Here's an example of the
8051 \begin_layout Address
8053 \begin_inset Newline newline
8056 Where do I send this
8057 \begin_inset Newline newline
8060 Your post office and country
8063 \begin_layout Standard
8064 As you can see, both
8071 \begin_inset space ~
8076 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8081 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8082 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8088 This makes sense, since
8096 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8097 Thus, you have to use
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8109 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8110 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8112 \begin_inset space ~
8116 \begin_inset space ~
8121 ) to start a new line in an
8128 \begin_inset space ~
8136 \begin_layout Subsection
8140 \begin_layout Standard
8141 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8142 or list of references.
8144 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8149 \begin_inset Index idx
8152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8161 \begin_layout Standard
8166 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8167 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8168 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8169 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8173 in anything else or vice versa.
8179 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8180 The book document classes ignores the
8184 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8188 in a letter document class.
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8196 environment does several things for you.
8197 First, it puts the centered label
8198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8206 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8208 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8209 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8210 the subsequent text.
8211 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8213 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8222 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8223 The new paragraph will still be in the
8228 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8229 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8232 \begin_layout Standard
8233 \begin_inset Float figure
8240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8242 \begin_inset Graphics
8243 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8251 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8256 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8277 \begin_layout Standard
8278 We would love to demonstrate the
8282 environment, but since this document is in the
8283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8290 class, we can't do this.
8291 We inserted it therefore as figure
8292 \begin_inset space ~
8296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8298 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8303 If you have never heard of an
8304 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8311 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8316 \begin_inset Index idx
8319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8328 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8335 \begin_layout Standard
8340 environment is used to list references.
8341 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8342 only use it at the end of the document.
8354 \begin_layout Standard
8355 When you first open a
8359 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8360 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8376 depending on the document class.
8377 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8378 Each paragraph of the
8382 environment is a bibliography entry.
8387 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8388 Each new paragraph is still in the
8395 \begin_layout Standard
8396 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8397 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8399 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8401 handling, have a look at section
8402 \begin_inset space ~
8406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8408 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8415 \begin_layout Subsection
8416 Special Environments
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8421 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8422 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8430 \begin_inset Index idx
8433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8443 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8456 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8458 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8463 key as a fixed whitespace.
8467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8480 \begin_inset space ~
8485 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8503 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8506 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8509 arg "newline-insert newline"
8526 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8527 So, when you finish using the
8532 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8533 Also, you can nest the
8538 environment inside of others.
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8545 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 arg "newline-insert newline"
8552 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8557 \begin_inset space \space{}
8567 arg "newline-insert newline"
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8577 arg "newline-insert newline"
8587 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8595 You must put at least one
8599 in any line you want blank.
8600 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8609 since that will insert
8614 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8617 arg "self-insert \""
8623 \begin_layout Standard
8627 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8631 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8635 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8639 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8643 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8644 printf("Hello World!
8649 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8653 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8657 \begin_layout Standard
8658 This is just the standard
8659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8669 \begin_layout Standard
8675 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8677 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8678 as if you used a typewriter.
8679 \begin_inset Index idx
8682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8683 Paragraph environments|)
8688 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8691 Program Code Listings
8696 \begin_inset space ~
8704 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8708 \begin_inset Index idx
8711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8720 \begin_layout Standard
8725 environment is similar to the
8730 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8731 computer console text.
8736 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8750 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8751 you can have empty lines.
8764 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 have a certain language and a text style
8768 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8770 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8771 and \SpecialChar TeX
8775 \begin_layout Standard
8776 Because of these properties
8780 works like a typewriter.
8784 \begin_layout Verbatim
8789 \begin_layout Verbatim
8793 The following 2 lines are empty:
8796 \begin_layout Verbatim
8800 \begin_layout Verbatim
8804 \begin_layout Verbatim
8806 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8811 \begin_layout Standard
8816 environment is identical to
8820 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8821 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8828 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8833 \begin_layout Section
8834 Nesting Environments
8835 \begin_inset Index idx
8838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8839 Nesting ! Environments
8845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8854 \begin_layout Subsection
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8860 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8862 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8864 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8866 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8878 \begin_layout Enumerate
8882 \begin_layout Enumerate
8887 \begin_layout Enumerate
8891 \begin_layout Enumerate
8896 \begin_layout Enumerate
8900 \begin_layout Standard
8901 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8902 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8904 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8906 \begin_inset space ~
8910 \begin_inset space ~
8918 \begin_inset space ~
8922 \begin_inset space ~
8927 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8929 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8932 arg "depth-increment"
8938 arg "depth-decrement"
8952 arg "depth-increment"
8958 arg "depth-decrement"
8962 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8963 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8967 \begin_layout Standard
8968 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8969 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8970 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8971 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8972 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8975 \begin_layout Standard
8976 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8978 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8980 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8983 \begin_layout Subsection
8984 What You Can and Can't Nest
8987 \begin_layout Standard
8988 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8989 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8994 than a simple yes or no.
8995 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8998 \begin_layout Itemize
8999 Completely unnestable
9002 \begin_layout Itemize
9003 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9007 \begin_layout Itemize
9008 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9012 \begin_layout Standard
9013 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9014 environments have them:
9017 \begin_layout Description
9018 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9019 Can't nest into them.
9023 \begin_layout Itemize
9029 \begin_layout Itemize
9035 \begin_layout Itemize
9041 \begin_layout Itemize
9047 \begin_layout Itemize
9054 \begin_layout Description
9056 \begin_inset space ~
9059 Nestable You can nest them.
9060 You can nest other things into them.
9064 \begin_layout Itemize
9070 \begin_layout Itemize
9076 \begin_layout Itemize
9082 \begin_layout Itemize
9088 \begin_layout Itemize
9094 \begin_layout Itemize
9100 \begin_layout Itemize
9106 \begin_layout Itemize
9113 \begin_layout Itemize
9119 \begin_layout Itemize
9126 \begin_layout Description
9127 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9128 You can't nest anything into them.
9132 \begin_layout Itemize
9138 \begin_layout Itemize
9144 \begin_layout Itemize
9150 \begin_layout Itemize
9156 \begin_layout Itemize
9162 \begin_layout Itemize
9168 \begin_layout Itemize
9174 \begin_layout Itemize
9180 \begin_layout Itemize
9186 \begin_layout Itemize
9192 \begin_layout Itemize
9198 \begin_layout Itemize
9204 \begin_layout Itemize
9210 \begin_layout Itemize
9214 \begin_inset space ~
9220 \begin_layout Itemize
9227 \begin_layout Standard
9228 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9246 \begin_inset space ~
9249 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9250 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9251 nested section headings violate this.
9259 \begin_layout Subsection
9260 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9261 \begin_inset Index idx
9264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9273 \begin_layout Standard
9274 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9275 affected by nesting anyhow.
9279 \begin_layout Itemize
9283 \begin_layout Itemize
9287 \begin_layout Itemize
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9293 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9301 Figures and tables in
9305 are not affected by this.
9310 Have a look at section
9311 \begin_inset space ~
9315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9317 reference "sec:Floats"
9321 for more information about
9328 \begin_layout Standard
9330 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9331 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9335 \begin_layout Standard
9336 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9344 of its own, it behaves just like a
9345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9352 paragraph environment.
9353 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9357 \begin_layout Standard
9358 Here's an example with a table:
9361 \begin_layout Enumerate
9366 \begin_layout Enumerate
9367 This is (a) and it's nested.
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9372 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9378 \begin_layout Standard
9380 \begin_inset Tabular
9381 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9382 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9468 \begin_layout Standard
9469 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9476 \begin_layout Enumerate
9478 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9482 \begin_layout Enumerate
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9487 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9490 \begin_layout Enumerate
9495 \begin_layout Enumerate
9496 This is (a) and it's nested.
9500 \begin_layout Standard
9501 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9507 \begin_layout Standard
9509 \begin_inset Tabular
9510 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9511 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9512 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9513 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9597 \begin_layout Standard
9598 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9604 \begin_layout Enumerate
9611 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9614 \begin_layout Enumerate
9618 \begin_layout Standard
9619 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9623 \begin_layout Standard
9624 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9627 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9630 \begin_layout Enumerate
9635 \begin_layout Enumerate
9636 This is (a) and it's nested.
9639 \begin_layout Standard
9640 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9646 \begin_layout Standard
9648 \begin_inset Tabular
9649 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9650 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9651 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9652 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9737 \begin_layout Standard
9738 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9744 \begin_layout Enumerate
9746 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9753 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 \begin_layout Standard
9758 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9764 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9765 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9769 \begin_layout Subsection
9770 Usage and General Features
9773 \begin_layout Standard
9774 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9775 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9784 is the innermost possible depth.
9785 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9788 \begin_layout Enumerate
9789 level #1 – outermost
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9798 \begin_layout Enumerate
9803 \begin_layout Enumerate
9808 \begin_layout Itemize
9813 \begin_layout Itemize
9822 \begin_layout Standard
9823 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9824 both of them in the example.
9825 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9835 For example, if we tried to nest another
9840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9847 , we would get errors.
9850 \begin_layout Subsection
9852 \begin_inset Index idx
9855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9864 \begin_layout Standard
9865 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9866 We have several examples of nested environments.
9867 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9872 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9875 \begin_layout Labeling
9876 \labelwidthstring MMM
9877 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9886 \begin_layout Labeling
9887 \labelwidthstring MMM
9888 #2-a This is level #2.
9889 We created it by using
9892 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9898 arg "depth-increment"
9905 \begin_layout Labeling
9906 \labelwidthstring MMM
9907 #3-a This is level #3.
9908 This time, we just enter
9915 arg "depth-increment"
9919 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9923 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9929 arg "depth-increment"
9936 \begin_layout Standard
9941 environment, nested inside of
9942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9950 So, it's at level #4.
9951 We did this by entering
9954 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9960 arg "depth-increment"
9963 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9968 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9984 \begin_layout Standard
9989 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9992 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9998 \begin_layout Labeling
9999 \labelwidthstring MMM
10000 #4-a This is level #4.
10004 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10007 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10012 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10016 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10021 keep nesting things inside
10022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10033 \begin_layout Labeling
10034 \labelwidthstring MMM
10035 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10040 \begin_layout Labeling
10041 \labelwidthstring MMM
10042 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10043 and this is level #6.
10044 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10048 \begin_layout Labeling
10049 \labelwidthstring MMM
10050 #5-b Back to level #5.
10054 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10060 arg "depth-decrement"
10067 \begin_layout Labeling
10068 \labelwidthstring MMM
10072 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10078 arg "depth-decrement"
10081 , we're back at level #4.
10085 \begin_layout Labeling
10086 \labelwidthstring MMM
10087 #3-b Back to level #3.
10088 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10092 \begin_layout Labeling
10093 \labelwidthstring MMM
10094 #2-b Back to level #2.
10098 \begin_layout Labeling
10099 \labelwidthstring MMM
10100 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10101 After this sentence, we will enter
10105 and change the paragraph environment back to
10112 \begin_layout Standard
10113 We could have also used the
10129 environment in place of the
10134 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10137 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10138 Example 2: Inheritance
10141 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10142 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10145 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10154 arg "depth-increment"
10158 \begin_inset Newline newline
10161 which, we will change to the
10169 \begin_layout Enumerate
10174 environment, at level #2.
10177 \begin_layout Enumerate
10178 Notice how the nested
10182 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10186 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10190 \begin_layout Standard
10191 We ended this example by entering
10196 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10200 and reset the nesting depth by using
10203 arg "depth-decrement"
10209 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10210 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10219 \begin_inset Argument 1
10222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10223 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10231 \begin_layout Enumerate
10232 This is level #1, in an
10236 paragraph environment.
10237 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10241 \begin_layout Enumerate
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10252 arg "depth-increment"
10256 Now, what happens if we nest an
10260 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10261 label be? An asterisk?
10265 \begin_layout Itemize
10275 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10276 So, its label is a bullet.
10277 (We got here by using
10280 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10286 arg "depth-increment"
10289 , then changing the environment to
10297 \begin_layout Itemize
10298 Here's level #4, produced using
10301 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10307 arg "depth-increment"
10311 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10316 \begin_layout Enumerate
10318 to get to level #5.
10319 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10324 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10328 , because we are in the
10336 environment (that is, it is an
10351 \begin_layout Enumerate
10356 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10357 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10361 \begin_layout Enumerate
10362 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10365 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10368 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10371 \begin_layout Enumerate
10375 arg "depth-decrement"
10378 to decrease the depth after the next
10381 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10388 \begin_layout Enumerate
10390 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10395 \begin_layout Enumerate
10397 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10398 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10402 \begin_layout Enumerate
10403 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10412 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10417 reset the counter for the label.
10421 \begin_layout Enumerate
10425 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10431 arg "depth-decrement"
10434 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10435 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10436 into the twofold-nested
10444 \begin_layout Enumerate
10445 The same thing happens if we do another
10448 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10454 arg "depth-decrement"
10457 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10460 \begin_layout Standard
10461 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10466 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10477 The number of other
10481 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10488 The same rule applies for the
10492 environment, as well.
10495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10496 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10499 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10501 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10502 the same detail with how we did it.
10511 \begin_layout Standard
10519 arg "depth-increment"
10526 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10527 the example in parentheses someplace.
10528 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10529 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10530 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10534 \begin_layout Enumerate
10539 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10543 \begin_layout Verse
10544 Now we will add verse.
10545 \begin_inset Newline newline
10548 It will get much worse.
10549 \begin_inset Newline newline
10559 arg "depth-increment"
10569 \begin_layout Verse
10570 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10571 \begin_inset Newline newline
10574 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10575 \begin_inset Newline newline
10581 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10589 \begin_layout Verse
10590 Here comes a table:
10594 \begin_layout Standard
10595 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10601 \begin_layout Standard
10603 \begin_inset Tabular
10604 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10605 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10606 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10607 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10692 \begin_layout Verse
10696 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10706 arg "depth-increment"
10712 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10718 \begin_inset Newline newline
10726 arg "depth-decrement"
10733 \begin_layout Enumerate
10738 : level #1) This is another item.
10739 Note that selecting a
10743 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10744 3 times to put the table inside the
10751 \begin_layout Quotation
10752 We're now ending the
10756 list and changing to
10761 We're still at level #1.
10762 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10763 The next set of paragraphs is a
10764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10771 We will nest both the
10778 \begin_inset space ~
10783 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10787 for the letter body.
10791 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10794 to preserve the depth.
10795 Remember that you need to use
10798 arg "newline-insert newline"
10801 to create multiple lines inside the
10808 \begin_inset space ~
10818 \begin_layout Right Address
10820 \begin_inset Newline newline
10823 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10824 \begin_inset Newline newline
10830 \begin_layout Address
10832 \begin_inset space ~
10838 \begin_layout Quotation
10839 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10843 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10844 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10845 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10846 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10847 as soon as possible.
10848 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10851 \begin_layout Quotation
10852 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10853 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10854 with your order, along with payment.
10857 \begin_layout Quotation
10858 We thank you again for your patience.
10861 \begin_layout Address
10863 \begin_inset Newline newline
10870 \begin_layout Quotation
10871 That ends that example!
10874 \begin_layout Standard
10875 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10876 gives you a lot of power with just
10878 We could have easily nested an
10899 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10902 \begin_layout Subsection
10904 \begin_inset Index idx
10907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10908 Nesting ! Separation
10914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10916 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10923 \begin_layout Standard
10924 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10926 For example you need two different enumerations:
10929 \begin_layout Enumerate
10934 \begin_layout Enumerate
10939 \begin_layout Enumerate
10943 \begin_layout Standard
10944 \begin_inset Separator plain
10950 \begin_layout Itemize
10956 \begin_layout Standard
10957 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10963 \begin_layout Enumerate
10967 \begin_layout Enumerate
10971 \begin_layout Enumerate
10975 \begin_layout Standard
10976 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10977 list item and use the menu
10979 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10980 Separated <Name> Above
10984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10985 Separated <Name> Below
10988 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10989 ) and before or behind it the
10991 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10994 \begin_layout Standard
10995 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10996 (red arrow in LyX).
10997 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10998 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11001 \begin_layout Standard
11002 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11005 arg "paragraph-break"
11012 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11015 \begin_layout Section
11016 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
11017 \begin_inset Index idx
11020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11029 \begin_layout Standard
11030 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11031 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11033 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11034 be broken at the end of a line.
11035 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11039 \begin_layout Subsection
11041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11043 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11048 \begin_inset Index idx
11051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11060 \begin_layout Standard
11061 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11062 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11063 ) not to break the line at
11065 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11068 \begin_layout Quote
11069 Further documentation is given in section
11070 \begin_inset Newline newline
11074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11076 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11084 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11099 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11108 A protected space is set with
11110 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11111 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11113 \begin_inset space ~
11121 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11127 \begin_layout Subsection
11129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11131 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11136 \begin_inset Index idx
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11140 Spacing ! Horizontal
11148 \begin_layout Standard
11149 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11151 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11152 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11156 The length units are listed in Appendix
11157 \begin_inset space ~
11161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11163 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11174 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11179 \begin_inset Index idx
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 Spaces ! Inter-word
11191 \begin_layout Standard
11192 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11193 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11194 at the ends of sentences.
11195 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11196 automatically takes care about this.
11197 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11198 followed by a period; see section
11199 \begin_inset space ~
11203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11205 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11210 To insert a normal space, select
11212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11213 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11215 \begin_inset space ~
11223 arg "space-insert normal"
11229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11233 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11238 \begin_inset Index idx
11241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11250 \begin_layout Standard
11252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11259 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11268 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11269 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11270 inside abbreviations:
11273 \begin_layout Quote
11275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11279 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11282 \begin_layout Standard
11283 or between values and units.
11284 Compare for example this:
11285 \begin_inset Newline newline
11289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11293 \begin_inset Newline newline
11296 10 kg (normal space
11299 \begin_layout Standard
11300 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11303 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11305 \begin_inset space ~
11313 arg "space-insert thin"
11319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11323 \begin_layout Standard
11324 You can also insert the following space types:
11327 \begin_layout Description
11329 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11331 \begin_inset space ~
11337 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11341 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11345 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11349 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11351 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11354 space between the arrows.
11355 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11359 \begin_layout Description
11361 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11363 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11367 \begin_inset space ~
11370 space A line with a
11371 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11375 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11379 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11383 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11385 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11388 space between the arrows.
11391 \begin_layout Description
11393 \begin_inset space ~
11397 \begin_inset space ~
11400 space A line with a
11401 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11405 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11409 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11412 negative thin space between the arrows.
11415 \begin_layout Description
11417 \begin_inset space ~
11421 \begin_inset space ~
11424 space A line with a
11425 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11429 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11433 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11436 negative medium space between the arrows.
11439 \begin_layout Description
11441 \begin_inset space ~
11445 \begin_inset space ~
11448 space A line with a
11449 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11453 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11457 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11460 negative thick space between the arrows.
11463 \begin_layout Description
11465 \begin_inset space ~
11469 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11477 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11481 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11485 \begin_inset space ~
11489 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11492 em) space between the arrows.
11495 \begin_layout Description
11497 \begin_inset space ~
11501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11505 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11509 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11513 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11517 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11524 em) space between the arrows.
11527 \begin_layout Description
11529 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11537 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11541 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11545 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11549 \begin_inset space ~
11553 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11556 em) space between the arrows.
11559 \begin_layout Description
11561 \begin_inset space ~
11565 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11569 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11574 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11581 cm space between the arrows.
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11586 \begin_inset space ~
11590 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11592 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11596 lists the different space sizes.
11599 \begin_layout Standard
11600 \begin_inset Float table
11607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11608 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11613 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11617 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11627 \begin_inset Tabular
11628 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11629 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11630 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11631 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11695 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11728 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11734 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11745 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11756 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11762 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11773 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11803 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11831 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11898 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11960 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11962 \begin_inset Index idx
11965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11974 \begin_layout Standard
11975 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11976 feature for adding extra space
11977 in a uniform fashion.
11978 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11979 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11980 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11981 equally between themselves.
11984 \begin_layout Standard
11985 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11988 \begin_layout Quote
11990 This is on the left side
11991 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11994 This is on the right
11997 \begin_layout Quote
12000 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12004 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12010 \begin_layout Quote
12013 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12017 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12021 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12027 \begin_layout Standard
12028 That was an example in the
12034 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12038 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12042 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12045 is one in a standard paragraph.
12046 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12050 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12054 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12057 \begin_inset space ~
12062 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12065 \begin_layout Standard
12067 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12071 \begin_inset space ~
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12079 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12083 \begin_inset space ~
12089 \begin_layout Standard
12091 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12095 \begin_inset space ~
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12103 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12107 \begin_inset space ~
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12115 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12117 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12121 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12122 (= opened downwards)
12125 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12129 \begin_inset space ~
12135 \begin_layout Standard
12137 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12139 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12143 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12147 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12151 \begin_inset space ~
12157 \begin_layout Standard
12158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12166 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12170 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12172 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12173 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12177 option in the space dialog.
12185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12189 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12194 \begin_inset Index idx
12197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12206 \begin_layout Standard
12207 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12208 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12211 \begin_layout Standard
12212 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12215 What is correct English?:
12216 \begin_inset Newline newline
12220 \begin_inset Newline newline
12224 \begin_inset space ~
12227 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12228 \begin_inset Newline newline
12232 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12243 \begin_inset Newline newline
12247 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12258 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12264 \begin_layout Standard
12266 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12275 \begin_inset space ~
12279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12283 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12285 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12286 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12290 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12296 \begin_inset space ~
12300 \begin_inset space ~
12304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12307 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12316 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12317 That is why it is named
12318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12326 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12327 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12331 \begin_layout Subsection
12333 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12335 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12340 \begin_inset Index idx
12343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12353 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12355 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12356 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12358 \begin_inset space ~
12364 There you find the following sizes:
12367 \begin_layout Standard
12380 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12381 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12386 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12391 \begin_inset space ~
12397 \begin_inset Index idx
12400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12401 Document ! Settings
12406 for the paragraph separation.
12407 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12416 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12422 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12431 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12432 size including line spacing.
12437 \begin_layout Standard
12443 \begin_inset Index idx
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12452 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12453 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12458 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12459 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12468 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 s are described in section
12478 \begin_inset space ~
12482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12484 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12493 If there are several
12497 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12498 You can therefore use
12502 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12505 \begin_layout Standard
12510 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12511 \begin_inset space ~
12515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12517 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12524 \begin_layout Standard
12525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12535 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12536 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12548 \begin_layout Subsection
12549 Paragraph Alignment
12550 \begin_inset Index idx
12553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12554 Paragraph ! Alignment
12562 \begin_layout Standard
12563 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12565 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12568 dialog (toolbar button
12571 arg "layout-paragraph"
12575 There are five possibilities:
12578 \begin_layout Itemize
12586 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12592 \begin_layout Itemize
12600 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12606 \begin_layout Itemize
12614 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12620 \begin_layout Itemize
12628 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12634 \begin_layout Itemize
12642 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12648 \begin_layout Standard
12649 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12650 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12651 the left and right margins.
12652 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12655 \begin_layout Standard
12657 This paragraph is right aligned,
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12662 this one is centered,
12665 \begin_layout Standard
12667 this one is left aligned.
12670 \begin_layout Subsection
12672 \begin_inset Index idx
12675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12676 Page breaks ! Forced
12682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12684 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12691 \begin_layout Standard
12692 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12693 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12694 force a page break where you want one.
12695 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12696 is good at page breaking.
12697 Only if you use a lot of
12701 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12702 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12705 \begin_layout Standard
12706 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12707 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12711 have to change the page breaking.
12714 \begin_layout Standard
12715 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12717 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12719 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12720 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12722 \begin_inset space ~
12728 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12731 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12733 \begin_inset space ~
12738 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12740 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12741 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12744 \begin_layout Standard
12745 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12746 at the top of a page.
12747 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12749 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12750 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12751 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12755 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12759 to learn more about
12766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12770 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12775 \begin_inset Index idx
12778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12779 Page breaks ! Clear
12787 \begin_layout Standard
12788 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12789 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12790 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12791 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12792 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12795 \begin_layout Standard
12796 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12798 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12799 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12801 \begin_inset space ~
12807 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12810 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12812 \begin_inset space ~
12816 \begin_inset space ~
12821 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12822 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12825 \begin_layout Subsection
12827 \begin_inset Index idx
12830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12839 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12846 \begin_layout Standard
12847 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12849 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12852 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12854 \begin_inset space ~
12858 \begin_inset space ~
12866 arg "newline-insert newline"
12870 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12872 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12873 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12875 \begin_inset space ~
12879 \begin_inset space ~
12887 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12890 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12892 This is useful to avoid
12893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12900 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12903 \begin_layout Standard
12904 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12905 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12907 very good at line breaking.
12908 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12909 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12916 reference "sec:Quote"
12921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12923 reference "sec:Verse"
12928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12930 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12937 \begin_layout Subsection
12939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12941 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12946 \begin_inset Index idx
12949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12958 \begin_layout Standard
12960 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12971 \begin_layout Standard
12975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12976 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12978 \begin_inset space ~
12983 you can insert horizontal lines.
12984 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12985 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12986 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12991 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13002 \begin_layout Section
13003 Characters and Symbols
13006 \begin_layout Standard
13007 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13008 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13009 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13017 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13021 for information on how this is done.
13024 \begin_layout Standard
13025 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13030 dialog via the menu
13032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13033 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13039 \begin_layout Standard
13040 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13048 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13049 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13051 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13059 \begin_layout Section
13060 Fonts and Text Styles
13061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13063 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13070 \begin_layout Subsection
13072 \begin_inset Index idx
13075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13084 \begin_layout Standard
13085 There are two types of fonts:
13088 \begin_layout Description
13090 \begin_inset space ~
13094 \begin_inset Index idx
13097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13103 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13108 characters) in the font.
13109 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13110 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13111 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13112 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13113 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13114 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13115 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13116 \begin_inset Newline newline
13119 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13120 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13121 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13122 sizes than at small ones.
13123 \begin_inset Newline newline
13137 \begin_inset space ~
13145 \begin_layout Description
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13151 \begin_inset Index idx
13154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13160 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13161 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13162 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13163 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13164 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13165 image manipulation program.
13166 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13167 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13168 \begin_inset space ~
13171 pixels high up to 34
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13175 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13176 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13177 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13179 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13180 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13181 \begin_inset Newline newline
13184 Bitmap fonts are named
13187 \begin_inset space ~
13192 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13195 \begin_layout Standard
13196 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13197 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13198 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13199 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13200 use scalable fonts.
13203 \begin_layout Standard
13204 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13207 \begin_layout Standard
13208 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13210 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13212 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13215 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13216 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13217 font to emphasize text, you use an
13218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13226 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13228 In \SpecialChar LyX
13229 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13233 \begin_layout Subsection
13236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13238 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13245 \begin_layout Standard
13246 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13247 used its own fonts.
13248 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13249 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13252 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13253 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13254 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13255 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13256 to a word processor.
13257 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13258 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13259 files are very portable across
13260 different machines.
13261 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13262 has increased a lot
13263 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13266 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13268 \begin_inset space ~
13272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13274 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13279 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13280 code in the document
13281 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13285 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13286 engines that are also able directly
13287 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13289 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13291 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13293 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13294 that is installed on your system.
13295 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13298 \begin_layout Standard
13299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13307 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13308 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13316 \begin_layout Subsection
13317 Document Font and Font size
13318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13320 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13325 \begin_inset Index idx
13328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13335 \begin_inset Index idx
13338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13347 \begin_layout Standard
13348 You can set the document fonts in the
13350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13354 \begin_inset Index idx
13357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13358 Document ! Settings
13368 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13369 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13372 \begin_inset space ~
13381 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13383 \begin_inset space ~
13386 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13389 \begin_layout Standard
13394 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13395 This requires that you use
13407 as the output format, i.
13408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 \begin_inset space \space{}
13415 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13416 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13417 installed (see section
13418 \begin_inset space ~
13422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13424 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13429 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13431 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13432 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13434 \begin_inset space ~
13437 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13438 cannot determine the family.
13439 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13440 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13443 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13446 \begin_layout Standard
13447 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13448 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13453 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13459 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13461 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13463 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13466 font encoding, this is
13467 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13468 , depending on the document language,
13471 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13472 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13480 \begin_inset space ~
13486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13496 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13497 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13505 \begin_inset space ~
13511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13519 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13535 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13540 European Computer Modern
13543 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13551 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13554 \begin_layout Standard
13559 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13560 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13565 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13568 \begin_inset space ~
13573 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13579 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13580 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13583 \begin_layout Itemize
13587 \begin_inset space ~
13592 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13610 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13611 community in order to replace
13615 as the default font.
13616 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13617 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13634 One difference is improved kerning.
13642 \begin_layout Itemize
13643 If you do not like the look of
13651 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13656 \begin_inset space ~
13662 \begin_inset space ~
13672 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13673 \begin_inset space ~
13676 serif and typewriter fonts,
13680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13681 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13682 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13688 \begin_inset space ~
13697 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13702 \begin_inset space \space{}
13710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13714 \begin_inset space \space{}
13720 \begin_inset space ~
13728 \begin_inset space ~
13738 but you can also select your own.
13739 \begin_inset Newline newline
13742 The differences between roman,
13745 \begin_inset space ~
13754 fonts are explained in section
13755 \begin_inset space ~
13759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13761 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13766 \begin_inset Newline newline
13772 \begin_inset space ~
13777 was originally designed for newspapers.
13778 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13779 into the small newspaper columns.
13783 \begin_inset space ~
13788 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13791 \begin_layout Standard
13792 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13805 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13810 depends on the class you are using.
13811 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13815 Note that the font size is the
13820 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13821 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13822 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13823 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13826 \begin_inset space ~
13832 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13833 \begin_inset space ~
13837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13839 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13850 \begin_inset space ~
13855 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13857 \begin_inset space ~
13860 serif or typewriter.
13865 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13875 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13878 \begin_layout Standard
13883 LaTeX font encoding
13885 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13886 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13892 \begin_inset Index idx
13895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13903 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13905 \begin_inset space ~
13909 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13911 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13918 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13919 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13920 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13924 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13932 \begin_layout Standard
13933 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13935 Use Old Style Figures
13939 Use True Small Caps
13942 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13945 Use Old Style Figures
13947 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13949 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13950 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13957 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13961 Use True Small Caps
13963 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13964 of scaled capitals.
13965 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13966 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13967 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13971 \begin_layout Standard
13973 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13974 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13975 provided by the font package (or the
13979 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13984 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13990 \begin_layout Standard
13995 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13996 a font to display the script characters.
14000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14001 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14007 \begin_inset Index idx
14010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14017 So this has no effect for the document language
14033 \begin_layout Standard
14036 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14038 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14039 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14045 \begin_inset Index idx
14048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14050 packages ! microtype
14059 \begin_layout Standard
14062 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14064 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14069 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14070 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14076 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14077 \begin_inset space ~
14081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14083 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14093 \begin_layout Standard
14094 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14098 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14106 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14111 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14112 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14114 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14119 dialog, see section
14120 \begin_inset space ~
14124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14126 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14138 \begin_layout Subsection
14142 \begin_layout Standard
14143 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14144 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14146 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14147 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14148 choose a math font in the dialog
14150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14154 \begin_inset Index idx
14157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14158 Document ! Settings
14164 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14165 automatically selects a math font.
14166 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14167 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14176 \begin_inset space ~
14182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14187 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14188 document font is available.
14191 \begin_layout Standard
14192 Note that the math font will not be used for
14196 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14202 or by the insertion of the command
14209 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14210 \begin_inset space ~
14214 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14215 while the math characters do not.
14217 \begin_inset space ~
14220 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14223 \begin_inset space ~
14231 \begin_inset space ~
14236 in the document font settings.
14239 \begin_layout Standard
14240 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14241 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14242 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14243 font (in most cases
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14250 \begin_inset space ~
14256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14259 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14260 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14268 \begin_inset space ~
14274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14280 \begin_layout Subsection
14282 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14292 name "subsec:charstyles"
14299 \begin_inset Index idx
14302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14309 \begin_inset Index idx
14312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14321 \begin_layout Standard
14322 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14323 automatically changes the
14324 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14327 style for certain paragraph environments.
14329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14330 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14332 This is where we meet the concept of
14338 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14340 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14344 \begin_layout Standard
14346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14351 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14375 e., available with all document classes.
14376 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14380 for specific purposes.
14381 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14384 \begin_layout Standard
14386 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14387 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14397 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14401 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14414 — you customized the
14419 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14420 among them, encourage the use of
14432 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14433 \begin_inset space ~
14437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14439 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14444 Rather than fiddling with
14448 , they encourage the use of
14452 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14457 \begin_inset Quotes els
14461 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14464 ), not their form (
14465 \begin_inset Quotes els
14469 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14473 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14474 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14475 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14476 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14477 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14478 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14484 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14488 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14489 With a semantic markup (such as
14493 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14498 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14500 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14501 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14504 \begin_layout Standard
14506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14507 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14508 by \SpecialChar LyX
14514 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14516 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14517 Builtin Text Styles
14518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14520 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14527 \begin_layout Standard
14529 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14530 The two builtin text styles can be
14531 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14535 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14539 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14540 both of these styles
14543 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14551 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14557 \begin_layout Standard
14562 style, do one of the following:
14565 \begin_layout Itemize
14566 click on the toolbar button
14575 \begin_layout Itemize
14576 use the key binding
14583 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14587 \begin_layout Itemize
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14597 arg "dialog-show character"
14603 arg "dialog-show character"
14606 ) as described in section
14607 \begin_inset space ~
14611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14613 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14622 \begin_layout Standard
14623 These commands are all toggles.
14628 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14631 \begin_layout Standard
14632 One typically uses the
14636 style for proper names.
14638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14645 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14651 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14655 \begin_layout Standard
14657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14662 is producing text in
14666 , but the definition can be changed.
14671 \begin_layout Standard
14673 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14683 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14690 \begin_layout Itemize
14691 clicking on the toolbar button
14700 \begin_layout Itemize
14701 using the keybindings
14708 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14712 \begin_layout Itemize
14714 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14722 arg "dialog-show character"
14728 arg "dialog-show character"
14731 ) as described in section
14732 \begin_inset space ~
14736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14738 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14747 \begin_layout Standard
14752 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14754 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14756 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14759 packages use a different font
14760 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14761 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14767 \begin_layout Standard
14768 We've been using the
14772 style all over the place in this document.
14773 Here's one more example:
14776 \begin_layout Quotation
14780 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14789 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14790 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14791 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14792 the common tendency to overuse
14793 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14795 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14800 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14802 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14806 \begin_layout Standard
14808 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14809 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14810 only as font changes and integrated in the
14818 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14821 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14828 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14834 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14839 \begin_inset space ~
14842 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14844 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14850 arg "dialog-show character"
14856 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14858 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14864 arg "dialog-show character"
14868 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14878 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14885 \begin_layout Standard
14887 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14888 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14890 \begin_inset space ~
14894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14896 reference "subsec:Modules"
14903 ), or local layout settings (see section
14904 \begin_inset space ~
14908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14910 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14915 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14919 markup for specific functions.
14920 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14925 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14935 \begin_inset Quotes els
14939 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14945 \begin_layout Standard
14947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14948 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14950 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14956 \begin_layout Standard
14958 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14959 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14964 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14965 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14966 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14971 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14972 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14985 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14986 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14987 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14988 \begin_inset Flex Code
14991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15002 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15007 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15016 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15021 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15030 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15031 on screen their formal appearance.
15036 \begin_layout Subsection
15038 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15044 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15050 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15052 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15058 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15060 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15066 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15071 \begin_inset Index idx
15074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15083 \begin_layout Standard
15084 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15088 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15090 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15092 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15096 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15097 the properties of text passages
15098 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15102 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15103 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15104 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15105 from ordinary dialog.
15106 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15110 \begin_layout Standard
15112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15113 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15114 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15115 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15116 the properties of the respective text passages.
15121 comes in as a last resort.
15126 \begin_layout Standard
15127 Before we document how to
15128 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15129 use custom character style
15130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15131 tweak the text properties
15133 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15134 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15136 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15140 \begin_inset Newline newline
15143 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15144 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15147 \begin_layout Standard
15149 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15150 use custom character styles
15151 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15152 tweak text properties
15155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15158 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15160 \begin_inset space ~
15163 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15165 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15171 arg "dialog-show character"
15176 dialog or press the toolbar button
15179 arg "dialog-show character"
15184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15187 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15188 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15193 property that you can choose.
15194 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15197 \begin_inset space ~
15202 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15204 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15208 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15210 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15215 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15216 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15217 environments all at once.
15220 \begin_layout Standard
15222 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15227 properties, and their options (in addition to
15230 \begin_inset space ~
15236 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15248 \begin_layout Labeling
15249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15263 The possible options are:
15267 \begin_layout Labeling
15268 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15273 This is the Roman font family.
15274 Normally a serif font.
15275 It's also the default family.
15285 \begin_layout Labeling
15286 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 \begin_inset space ~
15297 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15309 \begin_layout Labeling
15310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15317 This is the Typewriter font family.
15323 arg "font-typewriter"
15329 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15333 \begin_layout Standard
15335 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15336 The general differences of these families are:
15339 \begin_layout Itemize
15341 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15346 fonts use characters with serifs.
15347 These are the small
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15355 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15356 The following example shows the difference:
15357 \begin_inset Newline newline
15361 \begin_inset Newline newline
15366 text without serifs
15369 \begin_inset Newline newline
15372 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15373 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15380 \begin_layout Itemize
15382 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15387 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15388 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15389 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15392 \begin_layout Itemize
15394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15407 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15425 \begin_inset Newline newline
15429 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15434 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15447 \begin_inset Note Note
15450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15452 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15453 For more on phantoms see section
15454 \begin_inset space ~
15458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15460 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15470 \begin_inset Newline newline
15479 \begin_layout Labeling
15480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15485 This corresponds to the print weight.
15490 \begin_layout Labeling
15491 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15496 This is the Medium font series.
15497 It's also the default series.
15500 \begin_layout Labeling
15501 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15508 This is the Bold font series.
15521 \begin_layout Labeling
15522 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15527 As the name implies.
15532 \begin_layout Labeling
15533 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15538 This is the Upright font shape.
15539 It's also the default shape.
15542 \begin_layout Labeling
15543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15553 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15558 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15563 s the Italic font shape
15569 \begin_layout Labeling
15570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15577 This is the Slanted font shape
15579 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15580 , this is different from italic).
15583 \begin_layout Labeling
15584 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15588 \begin_inset space ~
15595 This is the Small caps font shape
15602 \begin_layout Labeling
15603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15608 Alters the text color.
15609 Note that not all DVI
15610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15612 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15615 viewers are able to display colors.
15617 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15621 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15623 \begin_inset space ~
15630 , which means that the document default color set in
15632 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15633 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15639 \begin_inset space ~
15645 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15647 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15651 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15731 \begin_inset Index idx
15734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15741 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15747 \begin_layout Labeling
15748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15753 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15754 the language of the document.
15755 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15756 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15757 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15760 in blue to indicate the change
15761 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15762 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15766 \begin_inset Newline newline
15769 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15771 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15772 When using the spell checking (see section
15773 \begin_inset space ~
15777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15779 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15783 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15784 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15786 \begin_inset Newline newline
15789 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15791 Exclude from Spellchecking
15794 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15797 \begin_layout Labeling
15798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15803 Alters the size of the font.
15805 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15807 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15811 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15814 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15815 document font size.
15816 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15817 the details, but a general description of what
15823 \begin_layout Labeling
15824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15845 arg "font-size tiny"
15851 \begin_layout Labeling
15852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15873 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15879 \begin_layout Labeling
15880 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15901 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15907 \begin_layout Labeling
15908 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15929 arg "font-size small"
15935 \begin_layout Labeling
15936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15950 It's also the default size.
15954 arg "font-size normal"
15960 \begin_layout Labeling
15961 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15982 arg "font-size large"
15988 \begin_layout Labeling
15989 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16010 arg "font-size larger"
16016 \begin_layout Labeling
16017 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16038 arg "font-size largest"
16044 \begin_layout Labeling
16045 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16066 arg "font-size huge"
16072 \begin_layout Labeling
16073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16094 arg "font-size giant"
16100 \begin_layout Labeling
16101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16106 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16126 arg "font-size increase"
16132 \begin_layout Labeling
16133 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16138 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16158 arg "font-size decrease"
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16170 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16171 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16173 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16174 — use those instead.
16175 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16178 \begin_layout Labeling
16179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16185 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16191 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16192 change a few other things at the character level
16193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16194 have text passages being underlined
16198 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16199 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16200 days, when you could not change fonts.
16201 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16202 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16203 because some people
16207 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16214 \begin_layout Labeling
16215 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16217 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16224 This is text with emphasize on
16227 This might seem like the same as
16231 , but it is actually a bit different.
16237 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16239 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16240 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16244 \begin_layout Labeling
16245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16247 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16252 Don't use underlining.
16257 \begin_layout Labeling
16258 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16260 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16264 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16272 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16274 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16283 arg "font-underline"
16289 \begin_inset Newline newline
16293 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16296 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16297 when you could not change fonts.
16298 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16299 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16300 because some people
16304 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16309 \begin_layout Labeling
16310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16314 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16316 \begin_inset space ~
16325 This is text with Double under
16326 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16328 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16337 arg "font-underunderline"
16341 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16343 \begin_inset Newline newline
16346 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16347 about double underbar
16352 \begin_layout Labeling
16353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16357 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16359 \begin_inset space ~
16368 This is text with Wavy under
16369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16380 arg "font-underwave"
16384 \begin_inset Newline newline
16387 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16388 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16389 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16394 \begin_layout Labeling
16395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16397 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16402 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16408 \begin_layout Labeling
16409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16416 Don't use strikethrough.
16419 \begin_layout Labeling
16420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16424 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16426 \begin_inset space ~
16430 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16438 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16440 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16441 Single strikethrough
16449 arg "font-strikeout"
16453 \begin_inset Newline newline
16456 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16457 changed in the meantime.
16460 \begin_layout Labeling
16461 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16463 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16467 \begin_inset space ~
16471 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16477 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16485 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16487 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16493 \begin_inset Newline newline
16496 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16500 \begin_layout Standard
16502 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16503 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16504 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16505 \begin_inset space ~
16509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16511 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16518 \begin_layout Itemize
16520 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16527 This is text with emphasize on
16532 \begin_layout Itemize
16536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16543 This is text with Noun on.
16545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16552 , this is a logical attribute.
16553 Normally it's equivalent to
16556 \begin_inset space ~
16566 \begin_layout Standard
16567 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16575 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16576 chosen a new character style
16577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16578 applied a text property
16581 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16584 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16586 \begin_inset space ~
16589 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16591 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16597 arg "dialog-show character"
16605 arg "dialog-show character"
16608 ) dialog, the settings are
16609 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16613 You can activate the
16614 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16616 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16617 last applied properties
16619 by using the toolbar button
16622 arg "textstyle-apply"
16626 The button lets you apply
16627 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16628 your custom character style
16629 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16632 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16634 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16635 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16636 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16637 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16642 \begin_layout Standard
16643 To completely reset the
16644 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16647 text properties of a selection
16649 to the default, use
16650 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16652 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16662 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16667 from the menu of the toolbar button
16670 arg "textstyle-apply"
16677 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16678 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16679 you just set the shape to
16680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16698 \begin_inset space ~
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16714 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16715 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16723 \begin_inset space ~
16735 \begin_layout Itemize
16737 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16750 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16768 \begin_inset Newline newline
16772 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16786 \begin_inset Note Note
16789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16790 For more on phantoms see section
16791 \begin_inset space ~
16795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16797 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16807 \begin_inset Newline newline
16813 \begin_layout Itemize
16815 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16820 fonts use characters with serifs.
16821 These are the small
16822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16829 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16830 The following example shows the difference:
16831 \begin_inset Newline newline
16835 \begin_inset Newline newline
16840 text without serifs
16843 \begin_inset Newline newline
16846 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16847 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16854 \begin_layout Itemize
16856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16861 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16862 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16863 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16868 \begin_layout Standard
16870 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16878 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16879 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16882 \begin_inset space ~
16887 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16888 the property to be removed.
16889 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16890 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16891 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16909 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16910 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16918 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16922 \begin_inset space ~
16927 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16938 If you, for example, set
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16957 \begin_inset space ~
16962 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16971 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16976 \begin_layout Standard
16978 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16981 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16982 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16985 \begin_layout Section
16986 Printing and Previewing
16989 \begin_layout Subsection
16993 \begin_layout Standard
16994 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16995 using \SpecialChar LyX
16996 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16997 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16998 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16999 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17001 Additional Features
17006 \begin_layout Standard
17008 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17011 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17012 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17013 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17016 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17017 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17018 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17019 to turn your writing into printable output.
17020 This happens in two stages:
17023 \begin_layout Enumerate
17024 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17025 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17027 a file with the extension,
17028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17042 \begin_layout Enumerate
17043 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17044 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17045 to use the commands in the
17049 file to produce printable output.
17052 \begin_layout Subsection
17053 Output file formats
17054 \begin_inset Index idx
17057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17066 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17074 Simple text (ASCII)
17075 \begin_inset Index idx
17078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17079 File formats ! ASCII
17087 \begin_layout Standard
17088 This file type has the extension
17089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17101 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
17102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17105 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17112 \begin_layout Standard
17113 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
17115 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17116 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17118 \begin_inset space ~
17124 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17125 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17126 bibliography (section
17127 \begin_inset space ~
17131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17133 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17138 If your document includes such material, use
17140 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17141 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17143 \begin_inset space ~
17147 \begin_inset space ~
17151 \begin_inset space ~
17159 \begin_inset space ~
17163 \begin_inset space ~
17169 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17170 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
17173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17176 \begin_inset Index idx
17179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17180 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17189 \begin_layout Standard
17190 This file type has the extension
17191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17202 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17205 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17206 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17207 -Errors or to process it manually
17208 with console commands.
17209 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17210 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17211 's temporary directory whenever you
17212 view or export your document.
17215 \begin_layout Standard
17216 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17217 -file using the menu
17219 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17220 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17224 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17225 export variants are explained in section
17226 \begin_inset space ~
17230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17232 reference "subsec:Export"
17239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17241 \begin_inset Index idx
17244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17253 \begin_layout Standard
17254 This file type has the extension
17255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17275 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17276 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17277 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17281 \begin_layout Standard
17282 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17283 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17284 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17285 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17286 when you view the DVI.
17287 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17290 \begin_layout Standard
17291 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17293 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17294 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17299 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17300 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17302 \begin_inset space ~
17308 The latter option uses the program
17310 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17316 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17319 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17320 font access (see section
17321 \begin_inset space ~
17325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17327 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17332 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17333 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17340 \begin_inset Index idx
17343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17344 File formats ! PostScript
17352 \begin_layout Standard
17353 This file type has the extension
17354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17366 PostScript was developed by the company
17370 as a printer language.
17371 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17373 PostScript can be seen as a
17374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17377 programming language
17378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17381 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17386 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17393 \begin_inset Index idx
17396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17398 packages ! pstricks
17408 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17411 \begin_layout Standard
17412 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17416 Encapsulated PostScript
17417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17420 (EPS, file extension
17421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17433 As \SpecialChar LyX
17434 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17435 convert them in the background to EPS.
17436 If, for example, you have 50
17437 \begin_inset space ~
17440 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17442 \begin_inset space ~
17445 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17446 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17448 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17449 EPS to avoid this problem.
17452 \begin_layout Standard
17453 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17455 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17456 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17462 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17464 \begin_inset Index idx
17467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17474 \begin_inset Index idx
17477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17486 \begin_layout Standard
17487 This file type has the extension
17488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17504 Portable Document Format
17505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17512 was derived from PostScript.
17513 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17522 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17523 looks exactly the same.
17526 \begin_layout Standard
17527 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17531 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17535 (JPG, file extension
17536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17563 Portable Network Graphics
17564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17567 (PNG, file extension
17568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17580 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17581 converts them in the
17582 background to one of these formats.
17583 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17584 will slow down your workflow.
17585 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17588 \begin_layout Standard
17589 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17591 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17597 \begin_layout Description
17599 \begin_inset space ~
17602 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17606 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17609 \begin_layout Description
17611 \begin_inset space ~
17618 ) This uses the program
17620 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17623 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17626 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17629 is a new engine, derived from
17633 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17634 access (see section
17635 \begin_inset space ~
17639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17641 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17646 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17647 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17652 \begin_layout Description
17654 \begin_inset space ~
17661 ) This uses the program
17666 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17672 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17673 font access (see section
17674 \begin_inset space ~
17678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17680 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17685 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17686 vertically written Japanese.
17689 \begin_layout Description
17691 \begin_inset space ~
17694 (cropped) This is the same as
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17702 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17703 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17704 to generate good-looking
17705 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17708 \begin_layout Description
17710 \begin_inset space ~
17713 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17717 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17721 \begin_layout Description
17723 \begin_inset space ~
17726 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17730 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17731 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17735 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17736 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17739 \begin_layout Standard
17743 \begin_inset space ~
17752 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17753 works without problems.
17754 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17755 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17759 \begin_inset space ~
17767 \begin_inset space ~
17772 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17780 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17782 \begin_inset Index idx
17785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 FileFormats ! XHTML
17792 \begin_inset Index idx
17795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17804 \begin_layout Standard
17805 This file type has the extension
17806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17818 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17819 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17820 When \SpecialChar LyX
17821 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17822 suitable for the purpose.
17823 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17826 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17829 between different formats, which are described in section
17831 Math Output in XHTML
17836 \begin_inset space ~
17844 \begin_layout Standard
17845 XHTML output remains
17846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17853 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17854 features are supported yet.
17858 and the World Wide Web
17862 Additional Features
17864 manual, for more information.
17867 \begin_layout Standard
17868 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17870 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17871 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17877 \begin_layout Subsection
17879 \begin_inset Index idx
17882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17891 \begin_layout Standard
17892 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17893 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17902 or use the toolbar button
17909 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17910 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17911 \begin_inset space ~
17915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17917 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17921 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17929 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17934 Further output formats can be selected via
17936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17937 View (Other Formats)
17939 or the toolbar button
17948 \begin_layout Standard
17949 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17950 viewer window using the menu
17952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17958 Update (Other Formats)
17963 \begin_layout Standard
17964 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17967 To have a real output, export your document.
17970 \begin_layout Section
17971 A few Words about Typography
17972 \begin_inset Index idx
17975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17984 \begin_layout Subsection
17985 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17986 \begin_inset Index idx
17989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17996 \begin_inset Index idx
17999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18008 \begin_layout Standard
18009 In \SpecialChar LyX
18011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18022 symbol comes in four variants: the
18039 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18045 \begin_layout Standard
18046 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18056 height_special "totalheight"
18061 backgroundcolor "none"
18064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18065 \begin_inset Tabular
18066 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18067 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18068 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18069 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18070 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18071 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18072 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18100 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18140 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18141 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18163 system key combination
18167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18168 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18180 and the em dash with
18183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18196 is the Mac label for the right
18206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18219 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18242 system key combination or
18243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18257 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18270 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18309 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18315 \begin_layout Standard
18316 Dashes can also be inserted with
18318 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18320 \begin_inset space ~
18323 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18331 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18332 and 2014 for the en dash).
18335 \begin_layout Standard
18336 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18337 mode and has a length of its own.
18338 Here are some examples:
18341 \begin_layout Enumerate
18342 line- and page-breaks
18343 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18353 \begin_layout Enumerate
18355 \begin_inset space ~
18359 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18369 \begin_layout Enumerate
18370 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18381 \begin_layout Enumerate
18382 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18386 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18396 \begin_layout Standard
18398 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18400 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18401 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18409 \begin_layout Subsection
18410 Dashes and Line Breaks
18411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18413 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18420 \begin_layout Standard
18421 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18422 case and locale, e.
18423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18429 \begin_layout Itemize
18430 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18431 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18434 \begin_layout Itemize
18435 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18439 \begin_layout Itemize
18440 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18441 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18444 \begin_layout Standard
18445 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18446 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 allows line breaks after hyphens
18458 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18460 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18463 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18466 \begin_layout Enumerate
18467 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18468 \begin_inset space ~
18471 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18473 The Elements of Typographic Style
18476 \begin_inset space ~
18479 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18482 \begin_layout Enumerate
18483 Unwanted line breaks
18488 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18490 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18493 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 Prevent Hyphenation
18505 \begin_inset space ~
18521 in \SpecialChar TeX
18523 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18524 , a protected space does not suffice
18528 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18535 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18536 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18537 in the document language.
18538 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18552 \begin_layout Itemize
18554 \begin_inset space ~
18558 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18568 height_special "totalheight"
18573 backgroundcolor "none"
18576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18585 \begin_layout Itemize
18587 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18597 height_special "totalheight"
18602 backgroundcolor "none"
18605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18607 \begin_inset space ~
18615 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18616 \begin_inset space ~
18619 – sont très utiles.
18622 \begin_layout Itemize
18627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18636 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18640 \begin_layout Standard
18641 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18642 \begin_inset space ~
18645 – in contrast to an overfull line
18646 \begin_inset space ~
18649 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18653 \begin_layout Standard
18654 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18658 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18659 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18660 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18665 \begin_layout Enumerate
18666 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18667 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18668 or \SpecialChar TeX
18674 \begin_layout Itemize
18676 \begin_inset space ~
18679 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18680 \begin_inset space ~
18683 – sont très utiles.
18687 \begin_layout Enumerate
18688 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18689 \begin_inset Newline newline
18694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18695 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18697 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18699 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18701 \begin_inset space ~
18707 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18709 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18711 \begin_inset space ~
18722 \begin_layout Itemize
18723 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18724 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18725 should be followed by
18726 a line break opportunity.
18729 \begin_layout Standard
18730 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18731 \begin_inset space ~
18735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18737 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18748 \begin_layout Enumerate
18749 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18750 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18751 or en dashes (see section
18752 \begin_inset space ~
18756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18758 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18769 Changes and backwards compatibility
18772 \begin_layout Standard
18773 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18775 \begin_inset space ~
18778 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18779 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18788 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18789 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18797 \begin_layout Standard
18798 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18800 \begin_inset space ~
18803 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18805 prevents ligation to dashes.
18807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18814 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18819 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18820 after the input (unless the current text font is
18828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 The behavior was changed since
18830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18845 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18846 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18847 as non-breakable dashes.
18848 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18856 \begin_layout Standard
18859 \begin_inset space ~
18867 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18869 \begin_inset space ~
18872 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18875 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18876 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18877 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18878 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18880 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18884 If you used both literal and
18885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18892 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18894 \begin_inset space ~
18897 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18898 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18901 \begin_layout Subsection
18903 \begin_inset Index idx
18906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18915 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18922 \begin_layout Standard
18923 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18924 but automatically in the output.
18925 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18931 \begin_inset Index idx
18934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18941 following the rules of the document language.
18943 does not hyphenate text in the
18947 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18950 \begin_layout Standard
18952 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18956 font and with unusual constructs, like
18957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18965 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18966 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18967 This is done with the menu
18969 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18970 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18972 \begin_inset space ~
18978 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18980 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18984 \begin_layout Standard
18985 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18986 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18997 would then see the hyphen
18998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19005 as a line break possibility.
19006 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19007 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19011 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19014 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19016 Prevent Hyphenation
19021 \begin_inset space ~
19029 \begin_layout Subsection
19031 \begin_inset Index idx
19034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19044 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19047 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19054 \begin_layout Standard
19055 When \SpecialChar LyX
19056 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19057 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19059 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19065 appropriate amount of space.
19066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19069 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19071 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19072 gets after another word.
19075 \begin_layout Standard
19076 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19077 not work in all cases.
19079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19090 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19091 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19094 \begin_layout Standard
19095 Here are some examples of
19099 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19102 \begin_layout Itemize
19107 \begin_layout Itemize
19112 \begin_layout Standard
19113 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19116 \begin_layout Itemize
19118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19122 this is too much space!
19125 \begin_layout Itemize
19130 \begin_layout Standard
19131 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19134 \begin_layout Standard
19135 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19138 \begin_layout Enumerate
19142 \begin_inset space ~
19147 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19154 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19159 \begin_inset Index idx
19162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19163 Spaces ! inter-word
19171 \begin_layout Enumerate
19175 \begin_inset space ~
19180 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19181 \begin_inset space ~
19185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19187 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19192 \begin_inset Index idx
19195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19204 \begin_layout Enumerate
19208 \begin_inset space ~
19212 \begin_inset space ~
19216 \begin_inset space ~
19223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19225 \begin_inset space ~
19230 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19231 This function is also bound to
19234 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19240 \begin_layout Standard
19241 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19244 \begin_layout Itemize
19246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19250 \begin_inset space \space{}
19253 this is too much space!
19256 \begin_layout Itemize
19257 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19261 \begin_layout Standard
19262 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19263 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19265 will take care of this.
19268 \begin_layout Standard
19269 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19273 \begin_inset space ~
19279 feature described in the section
19281 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19286 Additional Features
19291 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19293 \begin_inset Index idx
19296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19297 Typography ! Quotation marks
19303 \begin_inset Index idx
19306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 Quotation marks | see
19311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19337 \begin_layout Standard
19339 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19340 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19341 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19351 The keyboard character,
19355 , generates this automatically.
19358 \begin_layout Standard
19359 You can specify what character the
19363 key produces by using the submenu
19369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19373 \begin_inset Index idx
19376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19377 Document ! Settings
19382 dialog and switching the
19386 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19387 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19389 \begin_inset space ~
19395 \begin_layout Labeling
19396 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19408 \begin_inset space ~
19412 \begin_inset space ~
19416 \begin_inset Quotes els
19420 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19434 \begin_inset Quotes els
19438 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19441 quotation marks (as common, e.
19442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19448 \begin_layout Labeling
19449 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19452 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19456 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19460 \begin_inset space ~
19464 \begin_inset space ~
19468 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19472 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19478 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19482 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19486 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19490 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19493 quotation marks (as common, e.
19494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19500 \begin_layout Labeling
19501 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19504 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19508 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19512 \begin_inset space ~
19516 \begin_inset space ~
19520 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19524 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19530 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19534 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19538 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19542 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19545 quotation marks (as common, e.
19546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19552 \begin_layout Labeling
19553 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19556 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19560 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19564 \begin_inset space ~
19568 \begin_inset space ~
19572 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19576 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19582 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19586 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19590 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19594 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19597 quotation marks (as common, e.
19598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19604 \begin_layout Labeling
19605 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19608 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19612 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19616 \begin_inset space ~
19620 \begin_inset space ~
19624 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19628 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19634 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19638 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19642 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19646 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19649 quotation marks (as common, e.
19650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19653 g., in Switzerland)
19656 \begin_layout Labeling
19657 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19660 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19664 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19668 \begin_inset space ~
19672 \begin_inset space ~
19676 \begin_inset Quotes als
19680 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19686 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19690 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19694 \begin_inset Quotes als
19698 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19701 quotation marks (as common, e.
19702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19708 \begin_layout Labeling
19709 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19712 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19716 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19720 \begin_inset space ~
19724 \begin_inset space ~
19728 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19732 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19738 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19742 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19746 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19750 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19753 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19756 \begin_layout Labeling
19757 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19760 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19764 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19768 \begin_inset space ~
19772 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19780 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19786 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19790 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19794 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19798 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19801 quotation marks (as common, e.
19802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19805 g., in Great Britain)
19808 \begin_layout Labeling
19809 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19812 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19816 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19820 \begin_inset space ~
19824 \begin_inset space ~
19828 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19832 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19838 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19842 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19846 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19850 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19853 quotation marks (as common, e.
19854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19860 \begin_layout Labeling
19861 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19864 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19868 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19872 \begin_inset space ~
19876 \begin_inset space ~
19880 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19884 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19890 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19894 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19898 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19902 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19905 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19911 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19912 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19913 the inner marks differ).
19921 \begin_layout Labeling
19922 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19925 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19929 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19933 \begin_inset space ~
19937 \begin_inset space ~
19941 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19945 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19951 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19955 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19959 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19963 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19966 quotation marks (as common, e.
19967 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19973 \begin_layout Labeling
19974 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19977 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19981 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19985 \begin_inset space ~
19989 \begin_inset space ~
19993 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19997 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20003 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20007 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20011 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20015 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20018 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20021 \begin_layout Labeling
20022 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20023 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20031 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20037 \begin_inset space ~
20041 \begin_inset space ~
20047 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20055 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20059 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20063 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20067 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20071 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20074 quotation marks (as common, e.
20075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20083 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20084 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20092 \begin_layout Labeling
20093 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20094 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20102 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20108 \begin_inset space ~
20112 \begin_inset space ~
20118 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20126 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20130 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20134 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20138 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20142 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20145 quotation marks (as common, e.
20146 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20149 g., in North Korea and China)
20153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20154 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20155 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20163 \begin_layout Standard
20164 Inner quotation marks
20168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20170 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20171 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20172 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20179 does not necessarily mean
20180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20188 This is why we call them
20189 \begin_inset Quotes els
20193 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20209 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20211 \begin_inset Quotes els
20215 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20218 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20221 arg "quote-insert inner"
20226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20232 \begin_layout Standard
20233 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20234 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20235 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20236 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20237 If you check the setting
20239 Use dynamic quotation marks
20243 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20244 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20247 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20248 they appear in a special color).
20249 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20250 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20252 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20255 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20258 \begin_layout Standard
20259 Individual quotation marks (i.
20260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20263 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20264 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20268 \begin_layout Subsection
20270 \begin_inset Index idx
20273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 Typography ! Ligatures
20280 \begin_inset Index idx
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20314 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20321 \begin_layout Standard
20322 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20323 print them as single characters.
20324 These groups are known as
20329 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20330 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20332 Here are the standard ligatures:
20335 \begin_layout Itemize
20339 \begin_layout Itemize
20343 \begin_layout Itemize
20347 \begin_layout Itemize
20351 \begin_layout Itemize
20355 \begin_layout Standard
20356 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20359 \begin_layout Standard
20360 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20361 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20369 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20385 To break a ligature, use
20387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20388 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20390 \begin_inset space ~
20397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20408 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20425 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20433 \begin_layout Subsection
20435 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20437 \begin_inset Index idx
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20450 \begin_layout Standard
20453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20454 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20458 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20461 \begin_layout Description
20463 The name of the game.
20466 \begin_layout Description
20468 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20472 \begin_layout Description
20474 The \SpecialChar TeX
20475 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20479 \begin_layout Description
20480 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20481 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20485 \begin_layout Standard
20486 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20492 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20500 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20501 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20502 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20503 converges to the number
20504 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20507 : The actual version is
20508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20516 , the previous one was
20517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20528 \begin_layout Subsection
20530 \begin_inset Index idx
20533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20542 \begin_layout Standard
20543 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20544 space between two words.
20545 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20555 for units use the menu
20557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20558 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20560 \begin_inset space ~
20568 arg "space-insert thin"
20574 \begin_layout Standard
20575 Here is an example to show the differences:
20578 \begin_layout Standard
20579 \begin_inset Tabular
20580 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20581 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20582 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20583 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20590 \begin_inset space ~
20594 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20606 space between number and unit
20613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20622 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20634 half space between number and unit
20647 \begin_layout Subsection
20649 \begin_inset Index idx
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20653 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20661 \begin_layout Standard
20662 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20664 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20665 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20666 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20667 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20668 These bits of text became known as
20679 \begin_layout Standard
20680 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20681 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20682 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20683 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20684 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20685 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20686 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20687 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20688 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20689 \begin_inset Newline newline
20697 \begin_inset Newline newline
20705 \begin_inset Newline newline
20708 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20709 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20710 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20712 \begin_inset space ~
20716 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20718 key "latexcompanion"
20724 \begin_inset space ~
20728 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20735 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20736 's page break mechanism.
20739 \begin_layout Chapter
20740 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20743 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20750 \begin_layout Standard
20751 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20754 \begin_inset space ~
20760 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20763 \begin_layout Section
20765 \begin_inset Index idx
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20784 \begin_layout Standard
20786 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20789 \begin_layout Description
20792 \begin_inset space ~
20795 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20796 \begin_inset Newline newline
20800 \begin_inset Note Note
20803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20804 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20812 \begin_layout Description
20813 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20814 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20815 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20818 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20819 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20821 \begin_inset space ~
20827 \begin_inset Newline newline
20831 \begin_inset Note Comment
20834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20844 \begin_layout Description
20846 \begin_inset space ~
20849 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20850 set in the document settings under
20852 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20854 \begin_inset space ~
20860 \begin_inset Newline newline
20864 \begin_inset Newline newline
20868 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20877 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20878 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20883 of a comment that appears in the output.
20889 \begin_inset Newline newline
20893 \begin_inset Newline newline
20896 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20899 \begin_layout Standard
20900 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20912 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20915 \begin_layout Section
20917 \begin_inset Index idx
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20929 name "sec:Footnotes"
20936 \begin_layout Standard
20938 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20941 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20944 or the toolbar button
20947 arg "footnote-insert"
20959 \begin_inset Graphics
20960 filename clipart/footnote.png
20969 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20970 's representation of your footnote.
20980 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20999 label, the box will
21003 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21004 Clicking on the box label again will close
21017 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21018 and click on the footnote
21033 \begin_layout Standard
21034 Here is an example footnote:
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21043 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21051 \begin_layout Standard
21052 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21053 position where the footnote box is placed.
21054 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21055 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21056 according to the document class.
21058 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21059 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21065 ey are described in the
21068 \begin_inset space ~
21076 \begin_layout Section
21078 \begin_inset Index idx
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21090 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21097 \begin_layout Standard
21098 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21100 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21102 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21104 \begin_inset space ~
21109 or the toolbar button
21112 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21138 appearing within your text.
21139 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21140 's representation of your margin
21149 \begin_layout Standard
21150 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21154 \begin_inset Marginal
21157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 This is a marginal note.
21167 \begin_layout Standard
21168 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21169 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21170 pages, right on odd pages.
21173 \begin_layout Standard
21174 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21177 \begin_inset space ~
21185 \begin_inset space ~
21193 \begin_layout Section
21194 Graphics and Images
21195 \begin_inset Index idx
21198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 \begin_inset Index idx
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21217 name "sec:Graphics"
21224 \begin_layout Standard
21225 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21226 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21229 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21234 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21238 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21241 \begin_layout Standard
21242 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21247 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21248 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21250 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21251 \begin_inset space ~
21255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21257 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21264 \begin_layout Standard
21269 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21270 of the image in the output.
21271 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21275 \begin_inset space ~
21279 \begin_inset space ~
21288 \begin_inset space ~
21292 \begin_inset space ~
21296 \begin_inset space ~
21301 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21302 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21310 \begin_layout Standard
21314 \begin_inset space ~
21318 \begin_inset space ~
21323 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21324 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21326 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21331 \begin_inset space ~
21336 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21337 with the image size is printed.
21340 \begin_layout Standard
21341 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21342 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21344 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21347 \begin_layout Standard
21349 \begin_inset Graphics
21350 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21358 \begin_layout Standard
21359 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21360 the image into a float, see section
21361 \begin_inset space ~
21365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21367 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21374 \begin_layout Subsection
21376 \begin_inset Index idx
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21388 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21395 \begin_layout Standard
21396 You can insert images in any known file format.
21397 But as we explained in section
21398 \begin_inset space ~
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21404 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21408 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21410 therefore uses the program
21414 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21415 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21416 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21417 \begin_inset space ~
21421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21423 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21430 \begin_layout Standard
21431 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21434 \begin_layout Description
21436 \begin_inset space ~
21439 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21440 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21441 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21445 Graphics Interchange Format
21446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21449 (GIF, file extension
21450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21462 \begin_inset Index idx
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21497 Portable Network Graphics
21498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21501 (PNG, file extension
21502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21514 \begin_inset Index idx
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21549 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21553 (JPG, file extension
21554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21578 \begin_inset Index idx
21581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 \begin_layout Description
21614 \begin_inset space ~
21617 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21619 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21620 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21621 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21622 \begin_inset Newline newline
21625 Scalable image formats can be
21626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21629 Scalable Vector Graphics
21630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21633 (SVG, file extension
21634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21646 \begin_inset Index idx
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21681 Encapsulated PostScript
21682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21685 (EPS, file extension
21686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21698 \begin_inset Index idx
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21733 Portable Document Format
21734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21737 (PDF, file extension
21738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21750 \begin_inset Index idx
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21768 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21769 result will not be scalable.
21770 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21776 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21784 \begin_layout Standard
21785 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21792 \begin_layout Subsection
21793 Grouping of Image Settings
21794 \begin_inset Index idx
21797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21798 Images ! Settings grouping
21806 \begin_layout Standard
21807 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21809 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21810 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21812 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21813 need to manually change each of them.
21817 \begin_layout Standard
21818 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21821 \begin_inset space ~
21825 \begin_inset space ~
21837 \begin_inset space ~
21841 \begin_inset space ~
21847 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21848 and checking the name of the desired group.
21851 \begin_layout Section
21853 \begin_inset Index idx
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21872 \begin_layout Standard
21873 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21876 arg "tabular-insert"
21881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21885 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21886 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21887 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21890 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21891 from the rest of the table.
21892 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21893 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21895 Here is an example table:
21898 \begin_layout Standard
21900 \begin_inset Tabular
21901 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21902 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21903 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21904 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21905 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21906 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22104 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22108 \begin_layout Standard
22110 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22111 This corresponds to the
22112 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22119 table style listed in the style selection.
22122 \begin_layout Standard
22124 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22125 Other available styles include:
22128 \begin_layout Itemize
22130 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22132 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22139 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22143 \begin_layout Itemize
22145 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22146 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22149 \begin_layout Itemize
22151 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22160 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22161 bold top/bottom lines (see
22172 \begin_layout Standard
22174 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22175 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22176 button can be changed in
22178 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22179 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22183 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22187 \begin_layout Subsection
22191 \begin_layout Standard
22192 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22195 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22199 This brings up the table dialog.
22200 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22201 cursor is placed currently.
22202 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22203 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22204 done on all of your selection.
22207 \begin_layout Standard
22208 In addition to the table dialog, the
22211 \begin_inset space ~
22216 helps you in setting table properties.
22217 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22220 \begin_layout Standard
22224 \begin_inset space ~
22229 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22230 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22231 current cell respectively.
22232 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22234 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22235 of text, see section
22236 \begin_inset space ~
22240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22242 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22249 \begin_layout Standard
22250 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22251 using the check box
22260 This will merge the cells to
22264 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22265 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22266 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22267 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22268 in the last row without the upper border:
22271 \begin_layout Standard
22273 \begin_inset Tabular
22274 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22275 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22276 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22277 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22278 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22279 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22290 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22299 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 \begin_layout Standard
22411 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22412 -arguments for the table.
22413 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22414 explained in the chapter
22421 \begin_inset space ~
22427 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22428 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22429 but are visible in the output.
22432 \begin_layout Standard
22433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 Most DVI-viewers are
22445 able to display rotations.
22453 \begin_layout Standard
22458 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22463 adds lines for all cell borders.
22466 \begin_layout Subsection
22468 \begin_inset Index idx
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 Tables ! Multi-page
22478 \begin_inset Index idx
22481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22490 \begin_layout Standard
22491 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22494 \begin_inset space ~
22498 \begin_inset space ~
22506 \begin_inset space ~
22511 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22512 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22515 \begin_layout Description
22520 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22521 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22522 Except for the first page, if
22525 \begin_inset space ~
22533 \begin_layout Description
22537 \begin_inset space ~
22542 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22543 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22546 \begin_layout Description
22551 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22552 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22553 except for the last page, if
22556 \begin_inset space ~
22564 \begin_layout Description
22568 \begin_inset space ~
22573 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22574 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22577 \begin_layout Description
22578 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22579 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22585 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22588 \begin_inset space ~
22596 \begin_layout Standard
22597 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22598 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22599 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22605 In this context, first means first in this order:
22608 \begin_inset space ~
22620 \begin_inset space ~
22625 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22628 \begin_layout Standard
22630 \begin_inset Tabular
22631 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22632 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22633 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22634 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22635 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22636 <row endfirsthead="true">
22637 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22648 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22657 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 <row endfirsthead="true">
22668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <row endhead="true">
22701 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22712 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <row endhead="true">
22732 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22764 <row endfoot="true">
22765 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22785 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23775 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23786 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24251 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24406 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24623 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24746 <row endlastfoot="true">
24747 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24767 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24784 \begin_layout Subsection
24786 \begin_inset Index idx
24789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24796 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24798 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24805 \begin_layout Standard
24806 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24807 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24808 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24809 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24813 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24816 \begin_layout Standard
24817 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24818 for the column in the table dialog.
24819 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24820 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24824 \begin_layout Standard
24826 \begin_inset Tabular
24827 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24828 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24829 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24830 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24831 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24851 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 This is longer now.
24981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25033 This is longer now.
25038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25064 \begin_layout Standard
25065 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25066 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25071 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25072 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25078 Selection with the mouse or with
25082 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25083 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25084 the selection from outside the table.
25087 \begin_layout Section
25089 \begin_inset Index idx
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25108 \begin_layout Subsection
25112 \begin_layout Standard
25113 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25114 have a fixed location.
25116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25123 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25131 \begin_inset space ~
25136 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25137 too many notes on the current page.
25140 \begin_layout Standard
25141 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25142 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25143 and pages without text.
25144 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25145 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25146 Floats are therefore numbered.
25147 Referencing is described in section
25148 \begin_inset space ~
25152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25154 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25161 \begin_layout Standard
25162 To insert a float, use the menu
25164 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25168 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25169 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25171 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25172 \begin_inset Index idx
25175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25181 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25182 paragraph within the float.
25183 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25184 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25185 left-clicking on the box label.
25186 A closed float box looks like this:
25187 \begin_inset Graphics
25188 filename clipart/float.png
25193 – a gray button with a red label.
25196 \begin_layout Standard
25197 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25199 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25202 \begin_layout Subsection
25204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25206 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25211 \begin_inset Index idx
25214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25215 Floats ! Figure floats
25223 \begin_layout Standard
25225 \begin_inset space ~
25229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25231 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25235 was created using the menu
25237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25238 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25244 arg "float-insert figure"
25248 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25251 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25257 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25261 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25262 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25266 \begin_inset space ~
25274 arg "layout-paragraph"
25280 \begin_layout Standard
25281 \begin_inset Float figure
25288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25290 \begin_inset Graphics
25291 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25301 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25306 name "fig:A-star-in"
25323 \begin_layout Standard
25324 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25325 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25336 ) and refer to it using the menu
25338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25344 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25348 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25349 vague references like
25350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25357 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25358 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25368 For more about cross-references, see section
25369 \begin_inset space ~
25373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25375 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25382 \begin_layout Standard
25383 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25384 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25385 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25386 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25387 as described in section
25388 \begin_inset space ~
25392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25394 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25400 \begin_inset space ~
25404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25406 reference "fig:Two-images"
25410 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25411 You can also set the images one below the other.
25413 \begin_inset space ~
25417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25419 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25426 reference "fig:Star"
25430 are the subfigures.
25433 \begin_layout Standard
25434 \begin_inset Float figure
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25446 \begin_inset Float figure
25453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25459 name "fig:Undefinable"
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 \begin_inset Graphics
25473 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25489 \begin_inset Float figure
25496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25497 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25515 \begin_inset Graphics
25516 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25528 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25535 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25540 name "fig:Two-images"
25557 \begin_layout Subsection
25559 \begin_inset Index idx
25562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25563 Floats ! Table floats
25571 \begin_layout Standard
25572 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25574 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25575 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25578 or the toolbar button
25581 arg "float-insert table"
25585 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25586 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25587 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25589 \begin_inset space ~
25593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25595 reference "tab:Table-float"
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25603 \begin_inset Float table
25610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25611 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25616 name "tab:Table-float"
25628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25630 \begin_inset Tabular
25631 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25632 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25633 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25634 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25635 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25762 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25783 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25786 \end{array}\right]$
25794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25807 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25828 \begin_layout Subsection
25830 \begin_inset Index idx
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25842 \begin_layout Standard
25844 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25845 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25846 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25848 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25856 \begin_inset space ~
25864 \begin_layout Section
25866 \begin_inset Index idx
25869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25880 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25882 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25883 \begin_inset space \space{}
25890 \begin_layout Standard
25891 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25892 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25894 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25898 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25899 and its alignment within the page.
25902 \begin_layout Standard
25904 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25914 height_special "totalheight"
25919 backgroundcolor "none"
25922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25925 This is a minipage.
25926 The text is set in an italic style.
25929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25932 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25933 another formatting.
25941 \begin_layout Standard
25942 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25945 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25949 as described in section
25950 \begin_inset space ~
25954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25956 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25961 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25967 \begin_layout Standard
25968 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25978 height_special "totalheight"
25983 backgroundcolor "none"
25986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25987 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25988 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25994 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25998 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26008 height_special "totalheight"
26013 backgroundcolor "none"
26016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26017 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26018 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26026 \begin_layout Standard
26027 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26033 \begin_layout Standard
26034 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26036 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26043 \begin_inset space ~
26051 \begin_layout Chapter
26052 Mathematical Formulas
26053 \begin_inset Index idx
26056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26063 \begin_inset Index idx
26066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26097 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26104 \begin_layout Standard
26105 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26110 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26113 \begin_layout Section
26115 \begin_inset Index idx
26118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26127 \begin_layout Standard
26128 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26141 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26143 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26144 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26145 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26147 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26153 \begin_layout Standard
26154 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26158 \begin_inset space ~
26163 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26166 \begin_layout Standard
26167 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26168 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26171 \begin_layout Standard
26172 This is a line with an inline formula
26173 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26179 \begin_layout Standard
26180 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26181 paragraph, like this one:
26182 \begin_inset Formula
26189 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26192 \begin_layout Standard
26194 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26196 For example, typing
26197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26210 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26211 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26215 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26218 \begin_inset space ~
26226 \begin_layout Subsection
26227 Navigating in Formulas
26228 \begin_inset Index idx
26231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26240 \begin_layout Standard
26241 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26242 achieved with the arrow keys.
26244 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26245 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26250 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26251 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26255 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26259 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26262 \end{array}\right]$
26270 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26275 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26276 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26279 \begin_layout Standard
26284 , printed in this document as
26285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26289 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26296 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26297 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26298 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26303 For example, if you want
26304 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26312 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26322 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26326 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26331 , since in the latter case only the
26334 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26339 will be under the square root sign:
26340 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26346 \begin_layout Standard
26347 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26349 \begin_inset Formula
26351 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26360 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26361 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26364 \begin_layout Subsection
26368 \begin_layout Standard
26369 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26370 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26374 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26375 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26376 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26377 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26378 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26382 \begin_layout Subsection
26383 Exponents and Subscripts
26384 \begin_inset Index idx
26387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 \begin_inset Index idx
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26406 \begin_layout Standard
26407 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26410 arg "math-superscript"
26416 arg "math-subscript"
26419 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26421 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26424 , type in a formula
26427 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26437 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26443 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26447 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26453 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26459 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26468 , you have to use an extra
26472 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26473 For example, if you want
26474 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26480 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26486 Subscripts are similar: To get
26487 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26493 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26501 \begin_layout Subsection
26503 \begin_inset Index idx
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26515 \begin_layout Standard
26516 Create a fraction either with the command
26522 or by using the icon
26525 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26531 \begin_inset space ~
26537 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26538 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26539 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26544 To move back up, press
26549 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26550 \begin_inset Formula
26552 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26555 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26563 \begin_layout Subsection
26565 \begin_inset Index idx
26568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26577 \begin_layout Standard
26578 Roots can be created using the
26581 \begin_inset space ~
26589 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26595 arg "math-insert \\root"
26617 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26623 always produces a square root.
26626 \begin_layout Subsection
26627 Operators with Limits
26628 \begin_inset Index idx
26631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26638 \begin_inset Index idx
26641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26650 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26657 \begin_layout Standard
26659 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26663 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26666 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26667 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26668 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26669 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26670 The sum operator will automatically place its
26671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26678 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26680 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26684 \begin_inset Formula
26686 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26691 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26695 \begin_layout Standard
26696 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26698 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26699 behind the operator and using the menu
26701 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26702 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26704 \begin_inset space ~
26708 \begin_inset space ~
26722 \begin_layout Standard
26723 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26732 \begin_inset Index idx
26735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26742 \begin_inset Formula
26744 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26749 which will place the
26750 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26762 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26763 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26769 \begin_layout Standard
26770 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26777 Have a look at section
26778 \begin_inset space ~
26782 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26784 reference "subsec:Functions"
26788 for an explanation of function macros.
26791 \begin_layout Subsection
26793 \begin_inset Index idx
26796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26805 \begin_layout Standard
26806 Most math symbols can be found in the
26809 \begin_inset space ~
26814 under one of several categories; including
26831 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26835 \begin_layout Standard
26836 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26837 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26838 don't have to use the
26841 \begin_inset space ~
26846 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26848 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26851 \begin_layout Subsection
26853 \begin_inset Index idx
26856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26865 \begin_layout Standard
26866 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26872 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26878 \begin_inset space ~
26886 arg "math-insert \\space"
26890 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26891 For example, the sequence
26896 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26899 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26901 \begin_inset Graphics
26902 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26907 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26908 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26909 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26910 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26911 , because they are negative
26913 Here are two examples:
26916 \begin_layout Standard
26926 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26932 \begin_layout Standard
26942 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26948 \begin_layout Subsection
26950 \begin_inset Index idx
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26962 name "subsec:Functions"
26969 \begin_layout Standard
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26978 contains under the button
26981 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26984 a number of function macros, such as
26985 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26989 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26997 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27004 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27005 avoid confusions, because
27006 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27010 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27016 \begin_layout Standard
27017 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27019 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27023 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27029 \begin_layout Standard
27030 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27031 are placed, as described in section
27032 \begin_inset space ~
27036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27038 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27045 \begin_layout Subsection
27047 \begin_inset Index idx
27050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27059 \begin_layout Standard
27060 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27062 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27063 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27064 commands, for example, to enter
27065 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27068 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27069 Our example is entered by typing
27074 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27081 \begin_inset space ~
27085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27087 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27091 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27094 \begin_layout Standard
27095 \begin_inset Float table
27102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27103 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27108 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27112 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27122 \begin_inset Tabular
27123 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27124 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27125 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27127 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27211 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27265 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27319 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27373 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27427 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27481 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27535 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27589 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27643 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27688 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27709 \begin_layout Standard
27710 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27713 \begin_inset space ~
27721 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27724 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27728 \begin_layout Section
27729 Brackets and Delimiters
27730 \begin_inset Index idx
27733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 \begin_inset Index idx
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27752 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27759 \begin_layout Standard
27760 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27762 For some purposes, using just the keys
27767 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27768 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27769 toolbar delimiter icon
27772 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27776 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27777 \begin_inset Formula
27779 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27787 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27788 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27792 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27795 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27801 \begin_inset Formula
27803 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27812 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27813 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27817 \begin_layout Standard
27818 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27819 left side and right side.
27820 If you use the option
27823 \begin_inset space ~
27828 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27829 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27831 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27836 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27837 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27842 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27843 is to go inside the brackets.
27844 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27849 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27850 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27851 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27855 arg "math-delim ( )"
27861 \begin_layout Section
27862 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27863 \begin_inset Index idx
27866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27873 \begin_inset Index idx
27876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27883 \begin_inset Index idx
27886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27895 \begin_layout Standard
27896 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27900 \begin_inset space ~
27908 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27912 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27913 Here is an example:
27914 \begin_inset Formula
27916 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27925 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27926 \begin_inset space ~
27930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27932 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27937 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27938 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27939 This alignment is set in the box
27944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27993 for every column as default.
27994 For example, the sequence
27995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28006 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28007 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28008 corresponds to the relevant column.
28009 The result will look like this:
28010 \begin_inset Formula
28013 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28014 column & has & has\,right\\
28015 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28024 \begin_layout Standard
28025 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28028 arg "newline-insert newline"
28031 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28032 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28034 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28037 or the math toolbar.
28040 \begin_layout Standard
28041 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28042 It can be created with the menu
28044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28045 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28047 \begin_inset space ~
28059 Here is an example:
28060 \begin_inset Formula
28074 \begin_layout Standard
28075 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28078 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28081 arg "newline-insert newline"
28085 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28090 arg "newline-insert newline"
28093 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28101 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28102 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28103 A new row is created by every further entry of
28106 arg "newline-insert newline"
28110 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28111 Here is an example:
28112 \begin_inset Formula
28114 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28115 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28120 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28121 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28122 \begin_inset Formula
28124 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28132 \begin_layout Standard
28133 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28140 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28141 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28144 reference "eq:asquared"
28149 The other types are described in section
28150 \begin_inset space ~
28154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28156 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28163 \begin_layout Section
28164 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28165 \begin_inset Index idx
28168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28169 Math ! Formula numbering
28175 \begin_inset Index idx
28178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28179 Math ! Referencing formulas
28185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28187 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28194 \begin_layout Standard
28195 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28197 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28198 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28200 \begin_inset space ~
28204 \begin_inset space ~
28212 arg "math-number-toggle"
28216 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28217 within parentheses.
28218 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28219 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28220 the document class.
28221 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28222 separated by a dot:
28223 \begin_inset Formula
28233 arg "math-number-toggle"
28236 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28237 You can only number displayed formulas.
28240 \begin_layout Standard
28241 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28243 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28244 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28246 \begin_inset space ~
28250 \begin_inset space ~
28258 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28261 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28262 \begin_inset Formula
28265 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28271 To number all lines use the shortcut
28274 arg "math-number-toggle"
28280 \begin_layout Standard
28281 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28284 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28285 A label is inserted with the menu
28287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28296 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28297 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28298 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28310 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28311 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28312 We inserted in the following example the label
28313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28320 in the second line:
28321 \begin_inset Formula
28323 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28324 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28329 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28330 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28331 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28335 \begin_inset space ~
28343 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28347 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28348 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28349 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28350 as the formula number:
28353 \begin_layout Standard
28354 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28357 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28366 's cross-reference box are described in section
28367 \begin_inset space ~
28371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28373 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28378 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28386 \begin_layout Section
28387 User defined math macros
28388 \begin_inset Index idx
28391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28400 \begin_layout Standard
28402 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28403 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28404 Math macros are explained in section
28407 \begin_inset space ~
28419 \begin_layout Section
28423 \begin_layout Subsection
28425 \begin_inset Index idx
28428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28438 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28439 To set a font in a formula, use the
28442 \begin_inset space ~
28450 arg "math-insert \\font"
28453 , or enter its command, listed in table
28454 \begin_inset space ~
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28460 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28467 \begin_layout Standard
28468 \begin_inset Float table
28475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28476 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28481 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28485 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28495 \begin_inset Tabular
28496 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28497 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28498 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28499 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28531 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28558 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28585 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28618 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28645 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28667 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28673 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28674 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28687 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28703 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28737 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28759 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28765 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28773 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28802 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28836 \begin_layout Standard
28837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28845 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28848 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28850 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28854 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28873 \begin_layout Standard
28874 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28875 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28880 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28881 space when you need a space in the box.
28882 Here is an example where
28883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28894 denotes the set of numbers:
28895 \begin_inset Formula
28897 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28905 \begin_layout Standard
28906 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28907 You can, for example, put a character in
28916 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28920 \begin_inset Newline newline
28923 So it is better not to use this feature.
28926 \begin_layout Standard
28927 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28928 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28932 \begin_inset Newline newline
28935 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28941 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28942 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28948 \begin_layout Standard
28955 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28958 \begin_layout Standard
28959 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28962 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28964 \begin_inset space ~
28972 \begin_layout Subsection
28974 \begin_inset Index idx
28977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28986 \begin_layout Standard
28987 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28989 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28993 \begin_inset space ~
28997 \begin_inset space ~
29005 \begin_inset space ~
29013 arg "math-insert \\font"
29017 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29018 in black instead of blue.
29019 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29020 Here is an example:
29021 \begin_inset Formula
29024 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29025 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29034 \begin_layout Subsection
29036 \begin_inset Index idx
29039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29049 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29050 automatically chosen in most situations.
29068 For most characters,
29076 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29077 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29082 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29083 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29084 thinks are appropriate.
29085 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29088 arg "math-insert \\style"
29092 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29093 For example, you can set
29094 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29097 , which is normally in
29106 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29110 The four styles are used in the following example:
29113 \begin_layout Standard
29114 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29118 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29122 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29126 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29132 \begin_layout Standard
29133 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29134 is set in a particular size with the menu
29136 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29138 \begin_inset space ~
29143 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29144 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29145 will be adjusted to correspond.
29146 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29157 \begin_layout Standard
29161 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29167 \begin_layout Section
29168 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29170 \begin_inset Index idx
29173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29180 \begin_inset Index idx
29183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29194 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29195 that are in common use.
29198 \begin_layout Subsection
29199 Enabling AMS-Support
29202 \begin_layout Standard
29203 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29204 the document by selecting the checkbox
29207 \begin_inset space ~
29211 \begin_inset space ~
29215 \begin_inset space ~
29222 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29226 \begin_inset Index idx
29229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29230 Document ! Settings
29238 \begin_inset space ~
29244 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29245 -errors in formulas,
29246 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29249 \begin_layout Subsection
29251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29253 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29258 \begin_inset Index idx
29261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29262 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29270 \begin_layout Standard
29271 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29272 provides a selection of different formula types.
29274 allows you to choose between
29295 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29296 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29303 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29306 \begin_layout Chapter
29310 \begin_layout Section
29312 \begin_inset Index idx
29315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29324 name "sec:Cross-References"
29331 \begin_layout Standard
29332 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29333 's strengths is cross-references.
29334 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29336 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29337 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29338 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29341 \begin_layout Enumerate
29345 \begin_layout Enumerate
29346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29348 name "enu:Second-item"
29355 \begin_layout Enumerate
29359 \begin_layout Standard
29360 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29365 or by pressing the toolbar button
29372 A gray label box like this:
29373 \begin_inset Graphics
29374 filename clipart/label.png
29378 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29380 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29415 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29416 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29432 \begin_layout Standard
29433 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29438 or the toolbar button
29441 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29445 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29446 \begin_inset Graphics
29447 filename clipart/reference.png
29451 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29453 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29466 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29471 As an alternative to
29473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29476 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29481 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29482 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29484 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29496 \begin_layout Standard
29497 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29498 \begin_inset space ~
29502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29504 reference "enu:Second-item"
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 It is recommended to use a protected space
29516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29517 described in section
29518 \begin_inset space ~
29522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29524 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29533 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29534 line breaks between them.
29537 \begin_layout Standard
29538 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29541 \begin_layout Description
29542 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29545 reference "fig:Two-images"
29552 \begin_layout Description
29553 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29554 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29566 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29573 \begin_layout Description
29574 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29575 \begin_inset space ~
29579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29580 LatexCommand pageref
29581 reference "fig:Two-images"
29588 \begin_layout Description
29590 \begin_inset space ~
29594 \begin_inset space ~
29597 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29599 LatexCommand vpageref
29600 reference "fig:Two-images"
29605 \begin_inset Newline newline
29608 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29609 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29610 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29611 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29612 it prints “on the next page”.
29613 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29616 \begin_layout Description
29618 \begin_inset space ~
29622 \begin_inset space ~
29626 \begin_inset space ~
29629 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29632 reference "fig:Two-images"
29637 \begin_inset Newline newline
29640 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29646 ; otherwise it behaves like
29650 \begin_inset space ~
29654 \begin_inset space ~
29663 \begin_layout Description
29665 \begin_inset space ~
29668 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29669 \begin_inset Newline newline
29673 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29681 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29691 \begin_inset Index idx
29694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29696 packages ! prettyref
29702 \begin_inset Index idx
29705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29707 packages ! refstyle
29718 \begin_inset Newline newline
29721 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29722 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29725 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29738 is the default and preferred because
29742 supports only English documents.
29743 The format is specified by using the command
29755 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29756 preamble of the document.
29757 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29775 \begin_inset Newline newline
29782 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29787 \begin_inset Newline newline
29798 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29799 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29801 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29802 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29807 , you might do so as follows:
29808 \begin_inset Newline newline
29815 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
29820 \begin_inset Newline newline
29823 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29824 the package documentation
29825 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29827 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29833 \begin_inset Newline newline
29844 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29851 \begin_layout Description
29853 \begin_inset space ~
29856 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29858 LatexCommand nameref
29859 reference "fig:Two-images"
29866 \begin_layout Description
29868 \begin_inset space ~
29871 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29872 label for the reference:
29873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29874 LatexCommand labelonly
29875 reference "fig:Two-images"
29880 \begin_inset Newline newline
29883 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29884 Code, if you want to issue a command
29885 that \SpecialChar LyX
29891 , then you may want to use the
29894 \begin_inset space ~
29899 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29909 This is the form needed for e.
29910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29914 \begin_inset space \space{}
29921 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29922 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29924 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29928 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29932 \begin_layout Standard
29933 You can only use the style
29937 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29941 is always possible.
29944 \begin_layout Standard
29945 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29946 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29948 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29949 \begin_inset space ~
29953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29955 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29962 \begin_layout Standard
29963 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29971 \begin_inset space ~
29976 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29977 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29980 \begin_inset space ~
29985 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29986 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29989 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 You can change labels at any time.
29997 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29998 do not need to think about this.
30001 \begin_layout Standard
30002 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30004 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30008 \begin_layout Standard
30009 References are described in detail in the section
30010 \begin_inset space ~
30020 \begin_inset space ~
30028 \begin_layout Section
30029 Table of Contents and other Listings
30030 \begin_inset Index idx
30033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30040 \begin_inset Index idx
30043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30044 Navigating ! Outline
30050 \begin_inset Index idx
30053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30069 \begin_layout Subsection
30071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30073 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30080 \begin_layout Standard
30081 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30084 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30086 \begin_inset space ~
30090 \begin_inset space ~
30096 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30098 If you click on it, the
30102 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30103 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30104 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30106 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30108 \begin_inset space ~
30113 that is described in section
30114 \begin_inset space ~
30118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30120 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30127 \begin_layout Standard
30128 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30129 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30131 \begin_inset space ~
30135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30137 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30141 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30143 \begin_inset space ~
30147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30149 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30153 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30155 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30158 \begin_layout Subsection
30159 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30162 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30169 \begin_layout Standard
30170 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30172 You can insert them via the
30174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30175 List/Contents/References
30178 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30181 \begin_layout Section
30182 URLs and Hyperlinks
30183 \begin_inset Index idx
30186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30193 \begin_inset Index idx
30196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30205 \begin_layout Subsection
30207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30216 \begin_layout Standard
30217 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30225 \begin_layout Standard
30226 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30228 \begin_inset Flex URL
30231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30233 https://www.lyx.org
30241 \begin_layout Standard
30242 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30248 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30253 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30270 \begin_layout Subsection
30272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30274 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30281 \begin_layout Standard
30282 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30284 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30287 or with the toolbar button
30294 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30303 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30304 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30305 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30307 name "LyX's homepage"
30308 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30313 , an Email address like this:
30314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30316 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30317 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30323 , or a link to a file.
30328 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30350 to the link target.
30353 \begin_layout Standard
30354 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30355 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30356 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30357 the text style dialog.
30358 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30364 name "LyX's homepage"
30365 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30373 \begin_layout Standard
30374 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30378 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30380 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30381 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30385 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30387 \begin_inset Newline newline
30395 \begin_inset Newline newline
30402 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30403 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30407 \begin_layout Section
30409 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30411 \begin_inset Index idx
30414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30423 name "sec:Counters"
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30432 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374084
30433 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30434 is its ability to manage counters.
30435 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30436 modify counters directly.
30437 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30439 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero); to add
30440 to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be negative);
30441 to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30442 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30443 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30447 \begin_layout Standard
30449 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30450 There are five commands you can use:
30453 \begin_layout Enumerate
30455 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30456 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30459 \begin_layout Enumerate
30461 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30462 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30463 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30466 \begin_layout Enumerate
30468 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30469 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30472 \begin_layout Enumerate
30474 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30475 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30479 \begin_layout Enumerate
30481 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30482 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30485 \begin_layout Standard
30487 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30488 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30489 those that are available in the current document class.
30494 \begin_layout Section
30496 \begin_inset Index idx
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30508 name "sec:Appendices"
30515 \begin_layout Standard
30516 Appendices are created with the menu
30518 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30520 \begin_inset space ~
30524 \begin_inset space ~
30530 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30531 as the appendix part of the book.
30532 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30535 \begin_layout Standard
30536 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30537 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30538 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30539 and the subsection number.
30540 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30544 \begin_layout Standard
30546 \begin_inset space ~
30550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30552 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30560 \begin_inset space ~
30564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30566 reference "subsec:Export"
30573 \begin_layout Section
30575 \begin_inset Index idx
30578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30587 name "sec:Bibliography"
30594 \begin_layout Standard
30595 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30597 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30598 \begin_inset space ~
30602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30604 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30611 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30616 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30617 \begin_inset space ~
30621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30623 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30628 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30629 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30630 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30634 using a bibliography database.
30637 \begin_layout Standard
30638 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30639 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30643 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30644 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30645 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30646 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30647 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30650 \begin_layout Subsection
30651 The Bibliography Environment
30652 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30654 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30661 \begin_layout Standard
30666 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30668 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30677 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30679 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30680 of ASCII characters only.
30684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30686 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30689 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30695 \begin_inset Newline newline
30699 \begin_inset Flex URL
30702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30704 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30714 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30724 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30725 \begin_inset Newline newline
30732 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30733 the number of the entry.
30738 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30747 \begin_layout Standard
30748 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30753 or the toolbar button
30756 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30760 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30761 containing the available citations.
30762 Select one or more keys from the list and
30772 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30773 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30777 \begin_layout Standard
30778 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30779 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30780 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30792 \begin_layout Standard
30796 Companion Second Edition
30799 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30801 key "latexcompanion"
30809 \begin_layout Standard
30810 The \SpecialChar LyX
30811 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30812 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30822 \begin_layout Standard
30823 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30830 \begin_inset Index idx
30833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30842 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30843 the label needs to be given the form
30844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30855 Author A and Author B(Year)
30856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30863 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30870 \begin_inset space ~
30875 in the document settings
30876 \begin_inset Index idx
30879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 Document ! Settings
30887 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30889 \begin_inset space ~
30895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30897 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30905 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30907 Once you have done that, the
30911 dialog has three input fields instead of the
30928 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
30929 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
30930 These two are madatory.
30931 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
30934 Baker, Jones, and Williams
30936 ) and in abrreviated form (
30943 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
30944 add the abbreviated form to
30948 and the full list to the optional
30956 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
30957 If specified like this,
30959 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
30960 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
30963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30970 is specified, toggling
30971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30978 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
30979 full and abbreviated list
30983 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
30984 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
30985 the citation references.
30986 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
30991 \begin_layout Standard
30992 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
30995 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30997 \begin_inset space ~
31005 arg "layout-paragraph"
31009 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31012 \begin_layout Subsection
31013 Bibliography databases
31014 \begin_inset Index idx
31017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31018 Bibliography ! Databases
31024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31026 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31033 \begin_layout Standard
31034 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31040 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31042 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31043 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31048 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31050 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31051 your working field in a database.
31052 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31053 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31054 list for that document.
31055 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31059 \begin_layout Standard
31060 The database is a text file with the file extension
31061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31072 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31073 The format is explained in
31074 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31081 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31083 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31085 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31091 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31092 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31093 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31095 \begin_inset Flex URL
31098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31100 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31108 \begin_layout Standard
31110 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31111 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31112 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31114 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31116 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31117 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31118 Those are addressed by
31123 \begin_inset Index idx
31126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31128 packages ! biblatex
31134 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31135 (although it has been significantly
31136 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31146 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31147 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31148 might conversely fail to correctly
31149 handle databases that use specific
31158 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31162 \begin_layout Standard
31163 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31168 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31170 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31174 \begin_inset Index idx
31177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 Document ! Settings
31190 \begin_inset space ~
31195 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31204 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31206 \begin_inset Index idx
31209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31210 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31219 \begin_layout Standard
31220 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31223 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31224 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31226 \begin_inset space ~
31232 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31233 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31241 Add bibliography to TOC
31243 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31248 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31249 in the document or just the cited references.
31251 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31256 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31257 differ from the encoding of the document.
31262 \begin_layout Standard
31263 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31264 style file is a text file with the file extension
31265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31276 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31277 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31278 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31279 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31281 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31288 \begin_inset Newline newline
31292 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31294 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31304 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31309 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31313 \begin_layout Standard
31314 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31317 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31319 \begin_inset Index idx
31322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31323 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31329 \begin_inset Index idx
31332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31334 packages ! biblatex
31342 \begin_layout Standard
31343 Accessing a database via
31347 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31351 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31353 \begin_inset space ~
31359 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31360 you cannot select a
31365 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31369 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31372 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31373 As for the styles, note the following.
31378 \begin_layout Standard
31383 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31396 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31397 file (text file with the file extension
31398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31409 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31410 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31412 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31421 styles are not set in the
31424 \begin_inset space ~
31429 dialog, but in the document settings.
31430 \begin_inset Index idx
31433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31434 Document ! Settings
31439 However, in the dialog in the
31443 field, which is only visible if you use
31447 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31448 example how its heading will appear).
31449 These options are described in detail in the
31454 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31464 \begin_layout Standard
31465 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31466 \begin_inset space ~
31470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31472 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31483 Bibliography Processors
31486 \begin_layout Standard
31487 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31488 uses a bibliography processor,
31489 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31490 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31491 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31493 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31494 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31497 \begin_layout Standard
31498 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31500 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31501 You can do this on a general level in
31503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31504 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31505 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31508 or for individual documents in
31510 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31511 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31515 The following variants are available by default:
31518 \begin_layout Description
31519 biber a specific, modern processor
31520 \begin_inset Index idx
31523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31530 developed exclusively for
31534 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31540 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31545 makes use of; if you use the
31549 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31556 \begin_layout Description
31557 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31558 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31559 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31563 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31566 \begin_layout Description
31567 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31568 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31572 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31576 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31580 features are supported.
31583 \begin_layout Standard
31584 By default (with the
31590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31591 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31604 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31605 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31606 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31609 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31610 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31623 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31624 -based bibliography styles).
31625 This should suit most needs.
31628 \begin_layout Standard
31629 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31630 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31631 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31636 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31637 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31638 You can adjust it in
31640 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31641 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31642 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31648 \begin_layout Standard
31649 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31650 can add below the selection.
31651 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31652 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31658 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31674 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31676 These are explained in detail in section
31678 Customizing Bibliographies
31682 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31687 Additional Features
31690 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31694 \begin_layout Subsection
31696 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273424
31697 Bibliography entries allowing external view of the cited material
31700 \begin_layout Standard
31702 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273449
31704 supports viewing the material the selected citation points to – though
31705 you need to satisfy some conditions so the
31708 \begin_inset space ~
31712 \begin_inset space ~
31717 in the context menu of the citation inset is active and working.
31720 \begin_layout Standard
31722 \change_inserted 5863208 1598270259
31723 There are several ways how to make this feature available:
31726 \begin_layout Itemize
31728 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273631
31729 Have citations entries including any of the following fields:
31730 \begin_inset Flex Code
31733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31735 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273574
31744 \begin_inset Flex Code
31747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31749 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273595
31758 \begin_inset Flex Code
31761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31763 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273611
31771 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
31772 \begin_inset Flex Code
31775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31777 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273631
31786 This will launch web browser with the appropriate link.
31789 \begin_layout Itemize
31791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273665
31792 Having fields pointing to local files on your disk:
31793 \begin_inset Flex Code
31796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31798 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273656
31806 (filled by JabRef),
31807 \begin_inset Flex Code
31810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31812 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273665
31820 (filled by KBibTeX).
31821 This will launch appropriate file viewer.
31822 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
31827 \begin_layout Itemize
31829 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273865
31830 Supplying your own script named either
31831 \begin_inset Flex Code
31834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31836 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273683
31845 \begin_inset Flex Code
31848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31850 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273697
31858 , which takes year and first author name as an input.
31859 It will be responsibility of this script to search for the appropriate
31860 file on your disk and launch the viewer.
31861 This script needs to be found among other executables so
31863 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31867 Example templates with identical names can be found within your installation.
31872 \begin_layout Subsection
31874 \begin_inset Index idx
31877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31878 Bibliography ! Citation format
31884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31886 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31893 \begin_layout Standard
31894 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31899 \begin_inset space \space{}
31902 numerical citation (as
31903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31910 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31918 ) or author-year citations (as
31919 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31928 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31932 \begin_layout Standard
31933 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31937 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31941 \begin_inset Index idx
31944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31945 Document ! Settings
31950 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31956 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31957 labels, is there to use
31960 \begin_inset space ~
31971 \begin_inset space ~
31976 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31979 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31986 \begin_layout Standard
31987 With a bibliography database (see
31988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31990 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31997 ) one has in contrary to the
32001 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32002 These style formats are available:
32005 \begin_layout Description
32007 \begin_inset space ~
32010 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32011 -based approached without any additional packages
32012 (simple numeric citations).
32015 \begin_layout Description
32016 Biblatex loads the package
32021 \begin_inset Index idx
32024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32026 packages ! biblatex
32031 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32033 Biblatex citation style
32037 Biblatex bibliography style
32040 Options to the package
32044 can be entered in the
32051 \begin_layout Description
32053 \begin_inset space ~
32057 \begin_inset space ~
32060 mode) loads the package
32064 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32065 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32077 behavior very closely.
32082 this option has some additional styles.
32087 styles are also supported by this variant.
32090 \begin_layout Description
32092 \begin_inset space ~
32095 (BibTeX) loads the package
32100 \begin_inset Index idx
32103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32110 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32113 \begin_layout Description
32115 \begin_inset space ~
32118 (BibTeX) loads the package
32123 \begin_inset Index idx
32126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32133 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32145 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32147 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32156 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32158 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32159 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32161 Biblatex citation style
32164 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32170 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32174 \begin_layout Standard
32175 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32176 are available in the
32181 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32182 a name prefix such as
32183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32198 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32199 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32203 \begin_inset space \space{}
32207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32225 \begin_inset space \space{}
32228 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32234 \begin_inset space \space{}
32238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32250 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32254 \begin_inset space ~
32262 \begin_inset space ~
32268 Here is a simple example where the text
32269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32273 \begin_inset space ~
32277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32280 appears after the reference:
32283 \begin_layout Quote
32285 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32288 key "latexcompanion"
32296 \begin_layout Standard
32297 All styles except for
32301 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32311 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32315 \begin_layout Standard
32316 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32317 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32318 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32323 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32324 multi-citation (so-called
32325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32328 qualified citation lists
32329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32335 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32340 dialog will display three columns in the field
32347 \begin_inset space ~
32355 \begin_inset space ~
32363 \begin_inset space ~
32369 If you double-click on an item's
32372 \begin_inset space ~
32380 \begin_inset space ~
32385 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32388 General text before
32394 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32397 \begin_layout Section
32399 \begin_inset Index idx
32402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32418 \begin_layout Standard
32419 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32423 \begin_inset space ~
32428 or the toolbar button
32435 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32436 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32437 by \SpecialChar LyX
32438 as the index entry.
32441 \begin_layout Standard
32442 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32444 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32445 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32447 \begin_inset space ~
32453 A light blue box labeled
32454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32465 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32466 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32470 \begin_layout Standard
32471 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32472 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32473 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32474 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32476 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32478 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32486 \begin_layout Subsection
32487 Grouping Index Entries
32488 \begin_inset Index idx
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32500 \begin_layout Standard
32501 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32503 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32504 lists under the entry
32505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32513 First we create the entry
32514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32522 \begin_inset space ~
32526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32528 reference "subsec:Lists"
32533 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32534 \begin_inset space ~
32538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32540 reference "sec:Itemize"
32544 , we insert the command
32547 \begin_layout Standard
32553 \begin_layout Standard
32557 \begin_layout Standard
32563 \begin_layout Standard
32564 for the enumerated list in section
32565 \begin_inset space ~
32569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32571 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 The exclamation mark
32580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32587 marks the grouping levels.
32588 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32589 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32590 If we don't have an index entry for
32591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32598 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32601 \begin_layout Subsection
32603 \begin_inset Index idx
32606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32607 Index ! Page ranges
32615 \begin_layout Standard
32616 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32618 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32619 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32620 an index entry in section
32621 \begin_inset space ~
32625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32627 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32634 \begin_layout Standard
32637 Paragraph environments|(
32640 \begin_layout Standard
32641 and another entry at the end of section
32642 \begin_inset space ~
32646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32648 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32655 \begin_layout Standard
32658 Paragraph environments|)
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32686 respectively start and end the index range.
32687 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32688 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32689 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32690 An example is the index entry
32691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32694 Document ! Settings
32695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32701 \begin_layout Subsection
32703 \begin_inset Index idx
32706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32707 Index ! Cross referencing
32715 \begin_layout Standard
32716 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32717 We referred for example in the index entry
32718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32726 \begin_inset space ~
32730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32732 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32736 ) to the index entry
32737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32744 in the same section using the entry
32747 \begin_layout Standard
32750 GIF|see{Image formats}
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32756 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32757 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32760 \begin_layout Subsection
32762 \begin_inset Index idx
32765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32766 Index ! Entry order
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32775 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32776 follow the rules for the index order.
32777 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32783 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32791 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32800 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32801 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32826 \begin_inset Index idx
32829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32830 Dummy entries ! maïs
32836 \begin_inset Index idx
32839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32840 Dummy entries ! maître
32846 \begin_inset Index idx
32849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32850 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32855 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32856 maïs, maison, maître.
32857 To achieve this, we use the command
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32863 previous entry@current entry
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32867 In our case we want to have
32868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32883 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32886 \begin_layout Standard
32892 \begin_layout Standard
32893 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
32894 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
32896 See the next subsection for an example.
32899 \begin_layout Subsection
32901 \begin_inset Index idx
32904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32905 Index ! Entry layout
32913 \begin_layout Standard
32914 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
32915 \begin_inset Index idx
32918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32921 This is an italic dummy entry
32926 You can also format the page number using the character
32927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32931 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32934 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32935 -command without a backslash.
32936 We can write for example
32939 \begin_layout Standard
32942 italic page number:|textit
32945 \begin_layout Standard
32946 to get the page number in italic.
32947 \begin_inset Index idx
32950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32951 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
32956 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
32957 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
32959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32975 \begin_inset space ~
32981 Have a look at section
32982 \begin_inset space ~
32986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32988 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32992 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32996 \begin_layout Standard
32997 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33005 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33009 to generate the index, see section
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33016 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33025 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33030 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33031 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33034 key "latexcompanion"
33047 \begin_layout Standard
33048 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33050 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33051 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33052 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33053 If so, put the following in the preamble
33056 \begin_layout Standard
33068 \begin_layout Standard
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33078 \begin_layout Standard
33079 in the index entry.
33080 \begin_inset Index idx
33083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33084 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33089 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33090 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33091 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33094 \begin_layout Standard
33095 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33096 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33097 a bold font for all index entries.
33098 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33110 documentation for details,
33111 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33113 key "makeindex,xindy"
33121 \begin_layout Subsection
33123 \begin_inset Index idx
33126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33135 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33142 \begin_layout Standard
33143 If the index generation program
33147 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33148 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33152 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33153 distribution, is used.
33157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33162 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33163 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33164 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33165 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33166 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33176 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33178 dialog, see section
33179 \begin_inset space ~
33183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33185 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33190 The available options are listed and explained in
33191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33193 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33199 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33203 \begin_layout Standard
33204 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33205 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33209 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33213 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33214 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33217 \begin_layout Subsection
33221 \begin_layout Standard
33222 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33223 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33231 next to the standard index.
33233 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33234 that add this feature.
33241 \begin_inset Index idx
33244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 packages ! splitidx
33251 package to generate multiple indexes.
33252 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33268 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33269 style, but it also includes
33270 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33271 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33279 \begin_layout Standard
33280 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33281 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33284 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33287 and select the option
33289 Use multiple Indexes
33296 already contains the standard index
33297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33305 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33306 also appear as a heading) to the
33310 input field and press the
33315 The new index now also appears in the list.
33316 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33317 label color to the new index.
33320 \begin_layout Standard
33321 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33324 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33325 List/Contents/References
33331 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33332 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33333 are additional features:
33336 \begin_layout Itemize
33337 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33338 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33341 \begin_layout Itemize
33342 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33343 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33348 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33349 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33350 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33351 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33354 \begin_layout Itemize
33359 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33360 code in the name of the index.
33363 \begin_layout Section
33364 Nomenclature/Glossary
33365 \begin_inset Index idx
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33375 \begin_inset Index idx
33378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33409 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33416 \begin_layout Standard
33417 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33418 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33419 called nomenclature or glossary.
33422 \begin_layout Standard
33423 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33430 \begin_inset Index idx
33433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33443 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33450 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33454 \begin_layout Standard
33455 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33456 and then use the menu
33458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33464 \begin_inset space ~
33469 or the toolbar button
33472 arg "nomencl-insert"
33477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33488 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33491 \begin_layout Standard
33492 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33493 The first is the term or
33497 that you wish to define.
33502 of the term or symbol.
33505 \begin_layout Standard
33506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33515 code for nomenclature entries the option
33519 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33527 \begin_layout Subsection
33528 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33529 \begin_inset Index idx
33532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33533 Nomenclature ! Layout
33541 \begin_layout Standard
33542 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33546 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33553 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33561 \begin_inset Newline newline
33569 \begin_inset Newline newline
33575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33582 character starts/ends the formula.
33583 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33584 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33596 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33608 syntax is given in section
33609 \begin_inset space ~
33613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33615 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33622 \begin_layout Standard
33626 \begin_inset space ~
33631 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33633 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33638 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33645 in this document is:
33646 \begin_inset Newline newline
33651 dummy entry for the character
33656 \begin_inset Newline newline
33668 \begin_inset space ~
33678 font use the command
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33713 \begin_inset space \space{}
33717 \begin_inset Newline newline
33733 \begin_inset Newline newline
33736 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33737 This command will make the font of all symbols
33744 \begin_inset space ~
33752 \begin_layout Standard
33753 If the characters |
33754 \begin_inset space \space{}
33758 \begin_inset space \space{}
33762 \begin_inset space \space{}
33766 \begin_inset space \space{}
33770 \begin_inset space \space{}
33773 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33774 code they need to be escaped
33775 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33776 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33777 LatexCommand nomenclature
33778 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33779 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33787 \begin_layout Subsection
33788 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33789 \begin_inset Index idx
33792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33793 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33801 \begin_layout Standard
33802 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33803 -code of the symbol
33805 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33807 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33810 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33811 LatexCommand nomenclature
33813 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33821 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33825 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33826 LatexCommand nomenclature
33829 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33835 They will be sorted by
33836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33844 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33862 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33865 will be sorted before the
33869 since the character
33870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33877 is considered in sorting.
33880 \begin_layout Standard
33881 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33884 \begin_inset space ~
33889 field of the nomenclature dialog.
33890 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
33892 For the example given, you can insert
33896 in this field for the
33897 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33904 will be located before
33905 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33911 \begin_layout Standard
33912 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
33917 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33927 \begin_layout Subsection
33928 Nomenclature Options
33929 \begin_inset Index idx
33932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33933 Nomenclature ! Options
33939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33941 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
33948 \begin_layout Standard
33953 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
33954 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
33957 \begin_layout Description
33958 refeq Appends the phrase
33959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33974 to every nomenclature entry, where
33980 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
33983 \begin_layout Description
33984 refpage Appends the phrase
33985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34000 to every nomenclature entry, where
34006 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34009 \begin_layout Description
34010 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34013 \begin_layout Standard
34014 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34015 class options list in the
34017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34021 In this document the options
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34029 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34035 \begin_layout Standard
34036 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34037 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34042 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34045 \begin_layout Description
34055 \begin_layout Description
34058 nomrefpage Like the
34065 \begin_layout Description
34068 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34077 \begin_layout Description
34081 \begin_inset space ~
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34092 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34095 \begin_layout Standard
34097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34104 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34105 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34109 \begin_layout Standard
34118 \begin_inset Newline newline
34124 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34140 unskip, see equation
34143 \begin_inset Newline newline
34150 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34151 \begin_inset Newline newline
34157 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34161 \begin_inset space ~
34178 \begin_layout Standard
34179 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34187 in the document settings under
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34198 \begin_layout Standard
34206 \begin_inset Newline newline
34210 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34214 \begin_inset space ~
34226 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34228 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34229 \begin_inset Newline newline
34236 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34237 \begin_inset Newline newline
34241 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34257 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34262 \begin_layout Subsection
34263 Printing the Nomenclature
34264 \begin_inset Index idx
34267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34268 Nomenclature ! Printing
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34279 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34280 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34296 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34297 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34298 You can choose between these settings:
34301 \begin_layout Description
34302 Default a space of 1
34303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34309 \begin_layout Description
34311 \begin_inset space ~
34315 \begin_inset space ~
34318 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34321 \begin_layout Description
34322 Custom custom space
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34326 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34335 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34343 For example, in order to change the name to
34347 , add the following line to the preamble:
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34363 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34366 \begin_layout Standard
34367 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34368 \begin_inset Newline newline
34383 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34386 \begin_layout Subsection
34387 Nomenclature Program
34388 \begin_inset Index idx
34391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34392 Nomenclature ! Program
34398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34400 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34407 \begin_layout Standard
34413 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34414 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34416 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34421 by adding options, see section
34422 \begin_inset space ~
34426 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34428 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34433 The available options are listed and explained in
34434 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34436 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34444 \begin_layout Section
34446 \begin_inset Index idx
34449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34456 \begin_inset Index idx
34459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34460 Document ! Branches
34466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34468 name "sec:Branches"
34475 \begin_layout Standard
34476 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34477 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34478 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34479 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34482 \begin_layout Standard
34483 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34484 allows you to put text into branches.
34485 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34486 To create a branch, either select the menu
34488 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34489 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34492 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34494 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34501 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34502 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34503 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34504 and whether the name of the branch should
34505 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34506 (see below for an example).
34507 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34508 to the name of the other) and to add
34509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34521 \begin_inset space ~
34524 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34525 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34530 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34535 where you can choose a branch.
34536 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34540 \begin_layout Standard
34541 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34542 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34545 \begin_layout Standard
34546 \begin_inset Branch Question
34550 \begin_layout Standard
34555 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34563 \begin_layout Standard
34564 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34568 \begin_layout Standard
34573 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34581 \begin_layout Standard
34588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34589 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34592 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34593 Consider for example a file
34594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34601 which has the above branches.
34603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34610 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34634 branch were inactive,
34635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34650 branch was active, likewise
34651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34666 branch was active, and
34667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34670 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34674 if both branches were active.
34675 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34676 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34683 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34689 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34690 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34703 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34707 \begin_layout Standard
34713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34720 branch is deactivated.
34726 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34732 \begin_layout Standard
34733 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34734 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34735 definitions for each branch.
34736 For example you can define for the question branch
34740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34741 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34742 -syntax, see section
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34749 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34761 \begin_layout Standard
34771 \begin_layout Standard
34781 \begin_layout Standard
34782 and for the answer branch
34785 \begin_layout Standard
34795 \begin_layout Standard
34805 \begin_layout Standard
34806 \begin_inset Branch Question
34810 \begin_layout Standard
34814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34842 \begin_layout Standard
34843 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34847 \begin_layout Standard
34851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 \begin_layout Standard
34880 Now it is possible to use the
34884 question{\SpecialChar ldots
34891 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
34894 commands to obtain conditional output.
34895 Here is an example formula where only the
34902 \begin_inset Formula
34904 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
34912 \begin_layout Standard
34913 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
34921 \begin_layout Standard
34922 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
34924 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34928 \begin_inset space \space{}
34931 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
34933 For this advanced usage, see the
34939 Flex insets and InsetLayout
34944 \begin_layout Section
34946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34948 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
34953 \begin_inset Index idx
34956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34965 \begin_layout Standard
34968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34969 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34972 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
34974 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34980 \begin_inset Index idx
34983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34985 packages ! hyperref
34990 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
34991 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
34992 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
34993 part of the document.
34997 \begin_layout Standard
34998 The header information in the dialog tab
35002 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35003 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35004 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35005 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35009 \begin_inset space ~
35013 \begin_inset space ~
35018 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35019 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35020 and author entries.
35024 \begin_inset space ~
35028 \begin_inset space ~
35032 \begin_inset space ~
35037 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35040 \begin_layout Standard
35041 You can specify in the dialog tab
35045 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35050 \begin_inset space ~
35054 \begin_inset space ~
35058 \begin_inset space ~
35063 option allows long links to be split;
35066 \begin_inset space ~
35070 \begin_inset space ~
35074 \begin_inset space ~
35082 \begin_inset space ~
35087 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35090 \begin_inset space ~
35095 colors the different links.
35096 The default colors are:
35099 \begin_layout Labeling
35100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35105 for hyperlinks and URLs
35108 \begin_layout Labeling
35109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35117 \begin_layout Labeling
35118 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35126 \begin_layout Standard
35127 but you can change these in the field
35132 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35135 \begin_layout Standard
35138 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35146 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35147 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35148 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35151 \begin_layout Standard
35156 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35157 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35158 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35168 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35169 when opening the PDF.
35171 \begin_inset space ~
35174 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35175 \begin_inset space ~
35178 1 will only display the sections.
35181 \begin_layout Standard
35182 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35183 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35189 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35190 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35200 \begin_layout Section
35202 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35204 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35206 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35213 \begin_layout Subsection
35216 \begin_inset Index idx
35219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35229 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35236 \begin_layout Standard
35237 As \SpecialChar LyX
35238 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35239 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35240 commands and constructs,
35243 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35244 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35245 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35246 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35247 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35248 cannot support all packages and
35252 \begin_layout Standard
35253 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35254 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35255 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35259 Code box is created by the menu
35261 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35268 or by the toolbar button
35281 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35289 \begin_layout Standard
35290 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35292 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35294 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35299 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35304 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35311 , you can write the command part
35317 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35318 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35322 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35323 Code box behind the word.
35324 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35325 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35329 \begin_layout Standard
35330 \begin_inset Graphics
35331 filename clipart/ERT.png
35339 \begin_layout Standard
35343 \begin_layout Standard
35344 This is a line with a
35348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35371 \begin_layout Standard
35372 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35380 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35381 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35382 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35383 know that the command is finished.
35391 \begin_layout Subsection
35392 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35394 \begin_inset Argument 1
35397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35398 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35405 \begin_inset Index idx
35408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35418 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35425 \begin_layout Standard
35426 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35427 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35428 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35429 uses in the background.
35430 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35431 is based on commands, you can
35432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35440 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35441 any time if you know the right commands.
35442 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35443 is the end of the day.
35444 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35445 all caption labels bold.
35446 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35448 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35452 \begin_layout Standard
35453 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35455 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35457 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35460 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35470 \begin_layout Standard
35471 As result you find that the package
35476 \begin_inset Index idx
35479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35487 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35489 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35492 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35496 \begin_inset space ~
35504 \begin_layout Standard
35509 usepackage[options]{package name}
35512 \begin_layout Standard
35513 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35514 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35515 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35516 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35519 \begin_layout Standard
35520 In your case the package name is
35525 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35530 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35531 So you add the command
35534 \begin_layout Standard
35539 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35542 \begin_layout Standard
35543 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35548 For more commands provided by the
35552 package, have a look at its documentation,
35553 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35568 \begin_layout Standard
35569 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35571 For example if you use a
35575 class, you don't need the package
35579 , you can instead write
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35587 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35592 \begin_layout Standard
35593 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35594 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35595 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35602 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35605 \begin_layout Standard
35606 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35607 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35609 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35610 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35611 Code box as described in the previous
35615 \begin_layout Standard
35616 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35617 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35620 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35622 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35630 \begin_layout Standard
35631 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35637 \begin_layout Standard
35641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35651 \begin_inset Note Note
35654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35655 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35663 \begin_layout Left Header
35664 \begin_inset Argument 1
35667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35687 \begin_inset Note Note
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35691 defines the header line as described below
35699 \begin_layout Center Header
35700 \begin_inset Argument 1
35703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35712 \begin_layout Right Header
35713 \begin_inset Argument 1
35716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35737 \begin_layout Left Footer
35738 \begin_inset Argument 1
35741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35762 \begin_layout Center Footer
35763 \begin_inset Argument 1
35766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35778 \begin_inset Newline newline
35782 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35788 \begin_layout Right Footer
35789 \begin_inset Argument 1
35792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35814 \begin_layout Section
35815 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35818 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35823 \begin_inset Index idx
35826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35827 Document ! Header/Footer line
35833 \begin_inset Index idx
35836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35845 \begin_layout Standard
35846 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35850 \begin_inset space ~
35861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35867 \begin_inset space ~
35873 As a second step add in the menu
35875 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35876 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35885 Custom Header/Footerlines
35888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35892 This module offers the following 6
35893 \begin_inset space ~
35899 \begin_layout Description
35901 \begin_inset space ~
35905 \begin_inset space ~
35909 \begin_inset space ~
35913 \begin_inset space ~
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35923 \begin_layout Description
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35937 \begin_inset space ~
35941 \begin_inset space ~
35947 \begin_layout Standard
35948 for the different positions in the header/footer.
35949 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
35952 \begin_layout Standard
35953 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
35954 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
35956 \begin_inset space ~
35960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35962 reference "fig:Page-layout"
35966 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
35969 \begin_layout Standard
35970 \begin_inset Float figure
35977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35980 \begin_inset Tabular
35981 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
35982 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
35983 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35985 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
35987 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
35990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
35999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36005 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36016 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36045 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36049 The normal text on the page goes here.
36050 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36052 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36053 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36058 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36067 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36096 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36107 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36125 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36148 name "fig:Page-layout"
36152 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36165 \begin_layout Standard
36166 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36174 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36178 \begin_inset space ~
36183 is set to “Default”.
36184 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36193 \begin_layout Subsection
36197 \begin_layout Standard
36198 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36199 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36200 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36201 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36203 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36205 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36208 \begin_layout Standard
36209 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36210 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36216 \begin_inset space ~
36224 \begin_layout Description
36227 thepage prints the current page number
36230 \begin_layout Description
36233 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36236 \begin_layout Description
36239 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36242 \begin_layout Description
36245 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36246 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36253 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36256 because it usually goes in a left header.
36259 \begin_layout Description
36262 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36263 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36265 It is normally used in the right header.
36268 \begin_layout Subsection
36269 Default header/footer
36272 \begin_layout Standard
36273 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36274 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36275 footer has the page number.
36276 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36277 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36278 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36281 \begin_inset space ~
36289 \begin_layout Subsection
36293 \begin_layout Standard
36294 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36295 Some pages are different.
36296 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36297 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36298 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36299 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36300 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36304 Header and footer decoration line
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36308 By default, you get a 0.4
36309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36312 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36313 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36325 in the following way:
36328 \begin_layout Standard
36335 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36338 \begin_layout Standard
36339 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36352 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36359 \begin_layout Standard
36360 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36362 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36363 \begin_inset space ~
36367 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36377 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36378 Several header/footer lines
36381 \begin_layout Standard
36382 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36383 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36384 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36386 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36402 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36404 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_layout Standard
36419 headheight}{height}
36422 \begin_layout Standard
36427 is a size in standard units (e.
36428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36432 \begin_inset space \space{}
36440 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36441 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36442 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36443 logfile with the menu
36445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36460 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36465 \begin_inset Index idx
36468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36470 packages ! fancyhdr
36476 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36477 for your header/footer.
36480 \begin_layout Subsection
36484 \begin_layout Standard
36485 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36486 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36487 This example consists of the following definition:
36490 \begin_layout Description
36492 \begin_inset space ~
36501 , empty optional argument
36504 \begin_layout Description
36506 \begin_inset space ~
36509 Header empty, empty optional argument
36512 \begin_layout Description
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36523 in the optional argument
36526 \begin_layout Description
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36537 in the optional argument
36540 \begin_layout Description
36542 \begin_inset space ~
36555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36559 \begin_inset Newline newline
36563 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36570 in the optional argument
36573 \begin_layout Description
36575 \begin_inset space ~
36584 , empty optional argument
36587 \begin_layout Description
36590 headrulewidth set to 2
36591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36597 \begin_layout Standard
36598 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36599 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36605 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36615 \begin_layout Standard
36616 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36622 \begin_layout Standard
36626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36630 pagestyle{headings}
36636 \begin_inset Note Note
36639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36640 switches back to page style with the default headings
36648 \begin_layout Section
36649 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36652 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36657 \begin_inset Index idx
36660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36667 \begin_inset Index idx
36670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36679 \begin_layout Standard
36681 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36682 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36683 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36686 \begin_layout Subsection
36690 \begin_layout Standard
36691 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36697 \begin_inset Index idx
36700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36702 packages ! preview-latex
36707 (on some systems named simply
36712 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36714 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36721 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36723 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36731 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36732 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36733 -package are automatically
36734 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36738 \begin_layout Subsection
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36743 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36744 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36746 activate the option
36749 \begin_inset space ~
36756 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36762 \begin_inset space ~
36766 \begin_inset space ~
36769 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36776 \begin_inset space ~
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36794 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36797 \begin_layout Standard
36798 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36803 \begin_inset space ~
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_layout Standard
36820 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36821 and when you finish
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36826 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36834 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36835 generated by activating the option
36838 \begin_inset space ~
36844 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36852 \begin_layout Subsection
36853 Selected document parts
36856 \begin_layout Standard
36857 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36858 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36859 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36860 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36862 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36868 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36869 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36870 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36873 \begin_layout Standard
36874 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36881 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36893 is explained in section
36895 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
36900 \begin_inset space ~
36910 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
36911 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36912 the final rotated boxes,
36913 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
36914 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
36916 Here is the result:
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 \begin_inset Preview
36922 \begin_layout Standard
36927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36931 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
36937 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
36947 height_special "totalheight"
36952 backgroundcolor "none"
36955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36980 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
36986 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
36993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37009 Previewing works also for colors.
37010 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37029 is explained in section
37036 \begin_inset space ~
37049 \begin_layout Standard
37050 \begin_inset Preview
37052 \begin_layout Standard
37056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37075 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37080 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37099 \begin_layout Standard
37100 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37106 \begin_layout Standard
37107 If \SpecialChar LyX
37108 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37109 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37110 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37111 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37112 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37113 the \SpecialChar TeX
37115 If \SpecialChar LyX
37116 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37117 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37119 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37120 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37121 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37124 \begin_layout Subsection
37129 \begin_layout Standard
37130 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37131 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37134 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37136 \begin_inset space ~
37141 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37143 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37145 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37146 's main window, then only this selection
37147 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37148 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37149 the source view window.
37154 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37155 ; but note that if you have
37156 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37158 not just the one which is open at the time.
37161 \begin_layout Section
37162 Advanced Find and Replace
37163 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37165 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37170 \begin_inset Index idx
37173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37180 \begin_inset Index idx
37183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37192 \begin_layout Subsection
37196 \begin_layout Standard
37197 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37198 allows for searching of complex,
37199 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37201 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37202 The key-features are:
37205 \begin_layout Itemize
37206 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37207 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37208 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37212 \begin_layout Itemize
37213 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37214 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37215 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37216 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37219 \begin_layout Itemize
37220 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37221 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37222 outside of mathematics environments
37225 \begin_layout Itemize
37226 Search may be widened to a specific
37231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37235 \begin_inset space ~
37238 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37239 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37246 \begin_layout Itemize
37247 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37248 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37253 \begin_inset space ~
37256 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37259 \begin_layout Subsection
37263 \begin_layout Standard
37264 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37266 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37279 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37282 ) or the toolbar button
37285 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37291 Advanced Find and Replace
37296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37300 \begin_layout Standard
37306 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37315 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37318 arg "paragraph-break"
37322 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37323 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37327 arg "paragraph-break"
37330 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37334 searches backwards.
37337 \begin_layout Standard
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37346 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37355 \begin_inset space ~
37360 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37364 Searching for mathematics
37367 \begin_layout Standard
37368 Mathematical formulas, such as
37369 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37372 or something more complex like
37373 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37376 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37381 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37382 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37383 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37384 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37394 \begin_layout Standard
37395 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37396 This is done by switching to the
37400 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37405 This way, entering in the
37412 \begin_layout Itemize
37413 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37414 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37417 \begin_layout Itemize
37418 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37419 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37422 \begin_layout Itemize
37423 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37424 of it only within section headings.
37425 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37426 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37430 \begin_layout Itemize
37431 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37432 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37439 \begin_layout Standard
37440 The entries made in the
37444 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37447 \begin_inset space ~
37453 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37457 button or alternatively press
37460 arg "paragraph-break"
37467 while the cursor is in the
37470 \begin_inset space ~
37478 \begin_layout Standard
37479 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37481 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37485 \begin_layout Itemize
37486 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37487 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37495 with its typewriter version
37496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37510 \begin_layout Itemize
37511 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37517 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37529 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37536 (you may want to enable the
37539 \begin_inset space ~
37547 \begin_inset space ~
37552 options and disable the
37560 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37568 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37569 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37573 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37576 , or occurrences of
37577 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37581 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37587 \begin_layout Subsection
37591 \begin_layout Standard
37592 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37597 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37599 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37601 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37611 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37617 This is done with the context menu
37619 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37620 Insert Regular Expression
37622 while the cursor is in the
37627 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37628 expression matching rules
37632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37633 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37636 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37643 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37644 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37650 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37651 same text in the document.
37652 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37653 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37656 \begin_layout Enumerate
37657 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37662 editor the fraction
37663 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37667 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37670 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37671 fractions with the given denominator.
37674 \begin_layout Enumerate
37675 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37687 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37692 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37693 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37694 Also, by inserting a
37695 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37698 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37699 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37702 \begin_layout Standard
37703 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37704 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37705 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37708 , and referring back to them through
37709 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37713 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37717 For example, try searching with the regexp
37718 \begin_inset Newline newline
37721 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37724 \begin_inset Newline newline
37727 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37730 \begin_layout Standard
37731 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37734 \begin_layout Standard
37735 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37743 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37744 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37745 sub-expressions is absolute.
37747 \begin_inset space ~
37751 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37754 always refers to the first occurrence of
37755 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37758 in all entered regexps.
37766 \begin_layout Section
37768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37770 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37775 \begin_inset Index idx
37778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37787 \begin_layout Standard
37789 has a built-in spell checker.
37792 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37799 key or the toolbar button
37802 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37805 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37806 beginning of the currently selected text.
37807 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37808 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37809 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37810 scrolled so that it is visible.
37811 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37812 n, if any could be found.
37813 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37817 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37818 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37821 \begin_layout Standard
37822 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37825 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37829 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37830 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37832 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37833 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37836 \begin_inset space ~
37844 arg "dialog-show character"
37847 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37849 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37852 \begin_layout Standard
37853 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37854 can be downloaded from here:
37855 \begin_inset Newline newline
37859 \begin_inset Flex URL
37862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37864 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37870 \begin_inset Newline newline
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37877 files for each language.
37878 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37879 \begin_inset space ~
37882 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37883 's installation subfolder
37891 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37893 \begin_inset Newline newline
37896 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
37897 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
37898 but in most cases these are
37914 is the language code.
37917 \begin_layout Subsection
37921 \begin_layout Standard
37924 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37925 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37927 \begin_inset space ~
37930 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37933 you can set the following things:
37936 \begin_layout Description
37938 \begin_inset space ~
37941 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
37942 should use for spell checking.
37943 Depending on your platform,
37953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37954 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
37955 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
37970 \begin_inset space ~
37973 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
37976 \begin_layout Description
37978 \begin_inset space ~
37981 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
37982 will always use the given language
37983 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
37986 \begin_layout Description
37988 \begin_inset space ~
37991 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
37993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37997 \begin_inset space \space{}
38001 This should normally not be needed.
38004 \begin_layout Description
38006 \begin_inset space ~
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38013 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38025 \begin_layout Description
38027 \begin_inset space ~
38030 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38031 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38032 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38033 appear in a context menu.
38034 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38038 \begin_layout Description
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38044 \begin_inset space ~
38048 \begin_inset space ~
38051 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38055 \begin_layout Section
38057 \begin_inset Index idx
38060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38069 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38076 \begin_layout Standard
38078 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38079 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38091 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38101 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38103 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38104 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38105 which are available for many languages.
38108 \begin_layout Standard
38109 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38110 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38114 \begin_layout Subsection
38115 Setting up the thesaurus
38118 \begin_layout Standard
38127 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38131 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38136 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38142 \begin_inset space ~
38150 For instance, the US English files are named:
38153 \begin_layout Itemize
38157 \begin_layout Itemize
38161 \begin_layout Standard
38170 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38171 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38174 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38175 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38176 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38178 \begin_inset space ~
38183 ) to the path where they are installed.
38187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38188 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38189 ies, typical locations are
38195 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38199 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38203 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38206 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38212 LibreOffice-<Version>
38219 On the Mac, the default location is
38221 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38222 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38223 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38224 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38225 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38226 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38234 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38235 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38236 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38240 \begin_layout Standard
38241 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38242 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38244 \begin_inset Newline newline
38248 \begin_inset Flex URL
38251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38253 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38262 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38263 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38265 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38266 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38267 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38274 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38276 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38277 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38282 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38284 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38287 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38293 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38296 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38297 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38305 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38306 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38307 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38309 \begin_inset space ~
38314 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38317 \begin_layout Subsection
38318 Using the thesaurus
38321 \begin_layout Standard
38322 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38324 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38327 or the toolbar button
38330 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38333 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38335 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38337 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38338 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38339 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38348 ), related terms (such as
38351 \begin_inset space ~
38360 ), compounds (such as
38363 \begin_inset space ~
38372 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38381 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38384 \begin_layout Standard
38385 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38386 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38390 \begin_layout Standard
38391 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38392 the dictionary, such as the above
38396 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38397 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38401 \begin_inset space \space{}
38404 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38405 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38406 For example, looking up the word form
38410 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38415 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38420 \begin_inset space \space{}
38431 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38432 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38433 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38436 \begin_layout Section
38438 \begin_inset Index idx
38441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38448 \begin_inset Index idx
38451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38452 Document ! Change Tracking
38458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38460 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38467 \begin_layout Standard
38468 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38469 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38470 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38471 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38475 \begin_inset space ~
38478 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38480 \begin_inset space ~
38488 \begin_layout Standard
38489 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38503 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38504 You can change the color in
38506 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38507 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38509 \begin_inset space ~
38513 \begin_inset space ~
38518 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38524 \begin_inset Index idx
38527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38528 Color ! Change tracking
38533 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38534 's status bar when the
38535 cursor is in changed text.
38536 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38539 arg "changes-merge"
38545 \begin_layout Standard
38546 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38548 \begin_inset Index idx
38551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38560 \begin_layout Standard
38561 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38567 \begin_layout Standard
38568 \begin_inset Graphics
38569 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38577 \begin_layout Standard
38578 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38585 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38588 \begin_layout Standard
38589 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38595 \begin_layout Standard
38596 \begin_inset Tabular
38597 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38598 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38600 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38601 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38610 arg "changes-track"
38618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38624 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38626 \begin_inset space ~
38629 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38631 \begin_inset space ~
38640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38649 arg "changes-output"
38657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38665 \begin_inset space ~
38668 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38670 \begin_inset space ~
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38678 \begin_inset space ~
38687 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 Jumps to the next change
38714 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38723 arg "change-accept"
38731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38742 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38744 \begin_inset space ~
38753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 arg "change-reject"
38770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38776 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38781 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38783 \begin_inset space ~
38792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38801 arg "changes-merge"
38809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38820 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38822 \begin_inset space ~
38831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38840 arg "all-changes-accept"
38848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38854 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38856 \begin_inset space ~
38859 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38861 \begin_inset space ~
38865 \begin_inset space ~
38874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 arg "all-changes-reject"
38891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38899 \begin_inset space ~
38902 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38904 \begin_inset space ~
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38917 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38940 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38941 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
38943 \begin_inset space ~
38952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38975 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38993 \begin_layout Standard
38994 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39000 \begin_layout Standard
39001 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39021 \begin_layout Standard
39022 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39023 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39024 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39025 the next change after the current cursor position.
39026 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39027 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39028 step to the next change.
39029 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39032 \begin_layout Standard
39033 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39034 to describe a change.
39037 \begin_layout Standard
39039 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39040 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39046 \begin_inset Index idx
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39057 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39059 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39066 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39072 \begin_layout Section
39073 Comparison of Documents
39074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39076 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39081 \begin_inset Index idx
39084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 Comparison of documents
39093 \begin_layout Standard
39094 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39097 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39101 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39102 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39104 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39106 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39110 \begin_inset space ~
39114 \begin_inset space ~
39118 \begin_inset space ~
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39135 \begin_inset space ~
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39143 \begin_inset space ~
39147 \begin_inset space ~
39152 enables the change tracking option
39155 \begin_inset space ~
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_inset space ~
39168 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39171 \begin_layout Section
39172 International Support
39173 \begin_inset Index idx
39176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39177 International support
39185 \begin_layout Standard
39186 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39187 with any language you want.
39188 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39189 up \SpecialChar LyX
39191 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39193 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39201 \begin_layout Standard
39202 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39203 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39204 \begin_inset space ~
39208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39210 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39217 \begin_layout Subsection
39219 \begin_inset Index idx
39222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39229 \begin_inset Index idx
39232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39233 Document ! Settings
39239 \begin_inset Index idx
39242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39243 Document ! Language
39251 \begin_layout Standard
39254 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39255 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39258 dialog lets you set
39260 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39265 \begin_layout Standard
39270 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39280 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39281 For details about the different encoding options see section
39282 \begin_inset space ~
39286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39288 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39295 \begin_layout Subsection
39296 Keyboard mapping configuration
39297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39299 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39307 If you have for example a U.
39308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39311 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39312 can use an alternate keymap.
39313 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39318 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39319 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39320 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39323 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39330 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39335 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39336 which one you want to use.
39339 \begin_layout Standard
39340 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39341 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39342 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39346 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39347 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39348 one to support the characters you want.
39349 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39356 \begin_layout Chapter
39359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39361 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39368 \begin_layout Standard
39369 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39370 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39371 topic inside the user's guide.
39374 \begin_layout Section
39376 \begin_inset Index idx
39379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 \begin_layout Standard
39393 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39396 \begin_layout Subsection
39400 \begin_layout Standard
39401 Creates a new document.
39404 \begin_layout Subsection
39408 \begin_layout Standard
39409 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39410 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39411 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39413 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39414 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39420 \begin_layout Subsection
39424 \begin_layout Standard
39428 \begin_layout Subsection
39432 \begin_layout Standard
39433 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39434 Click there on a file to open it.
39437 \begin_layout Subsection
39439 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39443 \begin_layout Standard
39445 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39446 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39450 \begin_layout Subsection
39454 \begin_layout Standard
39455 Closes the current document.
39458 \begin_layout Subsection
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 Closes all opened documents.
39466 \begin_layout Subsection
39470 \begin_layout Standard
39471 Saves the actual document.
39474 \begin_layout Subsection
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39480 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39484 \begin_layout Subsection
39486 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39492 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39493 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39499 \begin_layout Subsection
39503 \begin_layout Standard
39504 Saves all opened documents.
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39512 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39515 \begin_layout Subsection
39519 \begin_layout Standard
39520 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39521 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39522 It is described in the section
39524 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39529 Additional Features
39534 \begin_layout Subsection
39538 \begin_layout Standard
39539 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39540 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39542 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39543 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39547 \begin_layout Standard
39548 When using the menu entry
39551 \begin_inset space ~
39556 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39560 \begin_inset space ~
39564 \begin_inset space ~
39568 \begin_inset space ~
39573 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39574 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39577 \begin_layout Subsection
39579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39581 name "subsec:Export"
39588 \begin_layout Standard
39589 You can export your document to various file formats.
39590 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39592 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39593 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39594 during its configuration.
39597 \begin_layout Standard
39598 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39600 \begin_inset space ~
39604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39606 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39613 \begin_layout Description
39619 \begin_inset space ~
39622 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39624 \begin_inset space ~
39627 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39628 \begin_inset Newline newline
39631 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39632 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39636 \begin_layout Description
39637 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39643 \begin_layout Description
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39648 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39654 \begin_layout Description
39655 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39656 's native DVI-format.
39657 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39658 files paths or file names in your document.
39660 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39667 \begin_layout Description
39668 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39669 in files paths or file names
39672 \begin_layout Description
39674 \begin_inset space ~
39681 ) DVI-format using the program
39683 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39686 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39690 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39698 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39706 \begin_layout Description
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39711 (cropped) the same as
39715 but with cropped page margins.
39718 \begin_layout Description
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39723 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39727 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39732 \begin_layout Description
39736 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39744 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39752 \begin_layout Description
39754 \begin_inset space ~
39758 \begin_inset space ~
39761 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39765 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39773 \begin_layout Description
39777 \begin_inset space ~
39786 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39787 source that is compilable with the program
39789 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39793 \begin_layout Description
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39802 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39803 source, additionally all images used in the document
39804 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39808 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39811 \begin_layout Description
39815 \begin_inset space ~
39820 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39821 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39822 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39830 \begin_layout Description
39834 \begin_inset space ~
39843 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39844 source that is compilable with the program
39850 \begin_layout Description
39852 \begin_inset space ~
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39863 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39864 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39870 \begin_layout Description
39872 \begin_inset space ~
39875 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39876 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39882 \begin_inset space \space{}
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39906 represent the version number)
39909 \begin_layout Description
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39915 \begin_inset space ~
39918 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
39919 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
39920 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39924 \begin_layout Description
39925 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
39926 's internal XHTML engine
39929 \begin_layout Description
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39935 \begin_inset space ~
39939 \begin_inset space ~
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39946 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
39951 For the conversion the program
39960 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39963 \begin_layout Description
39964 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
39969 \begin_layout Description
39971 \begin_inset space ~
39974 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
39976 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
39979 For the conversion the program
39988 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
39991 \begin_layout Description
39993 \begin_inset space ~
39996 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
39997 For the conversion the program
40006 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40009 \begin_layout Description
40011 \begin_inset space ~
40014 (cropped) the same as
40017 \begin_inset space ~
40022 but with cropped page margins
40025 \begin_layout Description
40029 \begin_inset space ~
40034 PDF-format using the program
40038 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40041 \begin_layout Description
40045 \begin_inset space ~
40049 \begin_inset space ~
40057 \begin_inset space ~
40062 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40067 \begin_inset space \space{}
40070 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40074 \begin_layout Description
40078 \begin_inset space ~
40083 PDF-format using the program
40085 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40088 , produces PDF-files directly
40091 \begin_layout Description
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40100 PDF-format using the program
40104 , produces PDF-files directly
40107 \begin_layout Description
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40116 PDF-format using the program
40120 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40123 \begin_layout Description
40127 \begin_inset space ~
40132 PDF-format using the program
40137 , produces PDF-files directly
40140 \begin_layout Description
40144 \begin_inset space ~
40152 \begin_layout Description
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40160 \begin_inset space ~
40165 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40166 and then exported as text using the program
40171 \begin_layout Description
40176 PostScript format using the program
40184 options see section
40185 \begin_inset space ~
40189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40191 reference "subsec:General-output"
40198 \begin_layout Description
40199 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40200 source and also code in the statistical programming
40214 it is possible to use
40218 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40222 \begin_layout Standard
40223 If one of the menu entries
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40239 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40241 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40243 \begin_inset space ~
40247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40249 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40254 \begin_inset Index idx
40257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40258 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40267 \begin_layout Subsection
40271 \begin_layout Standard
40272 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40273 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40276 \begin_inset space ~
40280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40282 reference "sec:Paths"
40287 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40296 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40297 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40298 's preferences as described in section
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40305 reference "subsec:Converters"
40312 \begin_layout Subsection
40313 New and Close Window
40316 \begin_layout Standard
40317 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40321 \begin_layout Subsection
40325 \begin_layout Standard
40326 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40329 \begin_layout Section
40331 \begin_inset Index idx
40334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40343 \begin_layout Subsection
40347 \begin_layout Standard
40348 Described in section
40349 \begin_inset space ~
40353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40355 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40362 \begin_layout Subsection
40363 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40366 \begin_layout Standard
40367 Described in section
40368 \begin_inset space ~
40372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40374 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40381 \begin_layout Subsection
40385 \begin_layout Standard
40386 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40387 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40390 \begin_layout Subsection
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40395 Selects the whole document.
40398 \begin_layout Subsection
40399 Find & Replace (Quick)
40402 \begin_layout Standard
40403 Described in section
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40410 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40417 \begin_layout Subsection
40418 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40421 \begin_layout Standard
40422 Described in section
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40429 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40436 \begin_layout Subsection
40437 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40440 \begin_layout Standard
40441 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40445 \begin_layout Subsection
40447 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40451 \begin_layout Standard
40453 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40454 Described in section
40455 \begin_inset space ~
40459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40461 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40470 \begin_layout Subsection
40472 \begin_inset Index idx
40475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40476 Paragraph ! Settings
40484 \begin_layout Standard
40485 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40486 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40491 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40492 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40499 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40511 \begin_layout Subsection
40513 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40517 \begin_layout Standard
40519 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40520 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40525 \begin_layout Enumerate
40527 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40528 Customize text properties by means of the
40534 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40537 ; this is described in section
40538 \begin_inset space ~
40542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40544 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40551 \begin_layout Enumerate
40553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40554 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40556 Apply last settings
40559 \begin_layout Enumerate
40561 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40562 Change the casing of selected text (
40577 \begin_layout Subsection
40579 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40583 \begin_layout Standard
40585 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40586 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40587 text styles (in the case of this document:
40609 \begin_inset space ~
40613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40615 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40624 \begin_layout Subsection
40625 Table and Rows & Columns
40628 \begin_layout Standard
40629 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40630 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40631 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40634 \begin_layout Subsection
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40639 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40640 It will dissolve this inset.
40641 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40645 \begin_layout Subsection
40649 \begin_layout Standard
40650 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40651 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40654 \begin_layout Subsection
40655 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40658 \begin_layout Standard
40659 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40661 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40662 \begin_inset space ~
40666 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40668 reference "sec:Nesting"
40673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40675 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40682 \begin_layout Section
40684 \begin_inset Index idx
40687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40697 At the bottom of the
40701 menu the opened documents are listed.
40704 \begin_layout Subsection
40705 Open/Close all Insets
40708 \begin_layout Standard
40709 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40712 \begin_layout Subsection
40713 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40716 \begin_layout Standard
40717 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40720 \begin_layout Standard
40721 Math macros are described in the
40728 \begin_layout Subsection
40732 \begin_layout Standard
40733 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40734 \begin_inset space ~
40738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40740 reference "sec:Navigating"
40745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40747 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40754 \begin_layout Subsection
40758 \begin_layout Standard
40759 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40761 \begin_inset space ~
40765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40767 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40774 \begin_layout Subsection
40778 \begin_layout Standard
40779 Opens a window showing console messages.
40780 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40785 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40786 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40787 is processing the document.
40790 \begin_layout Subsection
40792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40794 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40799 \begin_inset Index idx
40802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40811 \begin_layout Standard
40812 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40814 All toolbars and the
40817 \begin_inset space ~
40822 can be turned on and off.
40827 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset space ~
40856 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40860 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40867 \begin_layout Standard
40872 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40876 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40877 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40878 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40879 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40880 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40883 \begin_layout Standard
40885 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40892 reference "sec:Toolbars"
40899 \begin_layout Subsection
40903 \begin_layout Standard
40907 \begin_inset space ~
40911 \begin_inset space ~
40915 \begin_inset space ~
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40923 \begin_inset space ~
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40932 will split \SpecialChar LyX
40933 's main window vertically while
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40944 \begin_inset space ~
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40956 \begin_inset space ~
40961 will split it horizontally.
40962 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
40963 to view the same document, but at different positions.
40964 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
40965 three or more documents at the same time.
40966 To close a split view, use the menu
40969 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40981 \begin_layout Subsection
40985 \begin_layout Standard
40986 Closes a split view.
40989 \begin_layout Subsection
40993 \begin_layout Standard
40994 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
40995 so that you will see nothing but your text.
40996 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
40997 's main window fullscreen.
40998 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
40999 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41002 \begin_layout Section
41004 \begin_inset Index idx
41007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41016 \begin_layout Subsection
41020 \begin_layout Standard
41021 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41022 \begin_inset space ~
41026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41028 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41039 \begin_layout Subsection
41041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41043 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41050 \begin_layout Standard
41051 Here you can insert the following characters:
41054 \begin_layout Description
41059 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41062 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41063 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41064 -packages you have installed.
41065 You can get a complete display by checking
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41074 \begin_inset Newline newline
41078 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41086 Not all characters will be visible in the
41090 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41091 dialog (see section
41092 \begin_inset space ~
41096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41098 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41102 ) can display every character.
41110 \begin_layout Description
41111 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41115 \begin_layout Description
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41124 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41131 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41138 \begin_layout Description
41140 \begin_inset space ~
41143 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41147 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41153 \begin_layout Description
41155 \begin_inset space ~
41158 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41162 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41168 \begin_layout Description
41170 \begin_inset space ~
41173 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41177 \begin_layout Description
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41182 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41186 \begin_layout Description
41188 \begin_inset space ~
41192 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41193 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41199 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41204 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41210 \begin_inset space \space{}
41213 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41214 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41223 To insert a fraction use the command
41228 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41232 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41241 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41248 \begin_layout Description
41250 \begin_inset space ~
41253 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41257 \begin_layout Description
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41263 \begin_inset Index idx
41266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41273 \begin_inset Index idx
41276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41277 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41282 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41283 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41285 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41291 \begin_inset Index idx
41294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41302 \begin_inset Newline newline
41305 More information about this feature can be found in the
41311 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41317 \begin_layout Description
41318 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41320 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41321 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41325 \begin_layout Subsection
41329 \begin_layout Standard
41330 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41333 \begin_layout Description
41334 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41335 \begin_inset script superscript
41337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41346 \begin_layout Description
41347 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41348 \begin_inset script subscript
41350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41359 \begin_layout Description
41361 \begin_inset space ~
41364 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41365 \begin_inset space ~
41369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41371 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41378 \begin_layout Description
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41383 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41384 \begin_inset space ~
41388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41390 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41397 \begin_layout Description
41399 \begin_inset space ~
41402 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41403 \begin_inset space ~
41407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41409 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41416 \begin_layout Description
41418 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41420 \begin_inset space ~
41423 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41429 \begin_inset space \space{}
41432 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41433 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41442 To insert a fraction use the command
41447 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41451 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41460 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41469 \begin_layout Description
41471 \begin_inset space ~
41474 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41475 \begin_inset space ~
41479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41481 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41488 \begin_layout Description
41490 \begin_inset space ~
41493 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41500 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41507 \begin_layout Description
41509 \begin_inset space ~
41512 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41519 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41526 \begin_layout Description
41527 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41534 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41541 \begin_layout Description
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41546 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41547 \begin_inset space ~
41551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41553 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41560 \begin_layout Description
41562 \begin_inset space ~
41565 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41566 \begin_inset space ~
41570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41572 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41579 \begin_layout Description
41581 \begin_inset space ~
41585 \begin_inset space ~
41588 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41597 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41604 for a usage example.
41607 \begin_layout Description
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41613 \begin_inset space ~
41616 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41623 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41630 \begin_layout Description
41632 \begin_inset space ~
41635 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41636 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41639 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41646 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41653 \begin_layout Description
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41658 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41665 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41672 \begin_layout Description
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41677 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41678 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41680 \begin_inset space ~
41684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41686 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41693 \begin_layout Description
41695 \begin_inset space ~
41698 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41699 \begin_inset space ~
41703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41705 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41712 \begin_layout Description
41714 \begin_inset space ~
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41721 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41728 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41735 \begin_layout Subsection
41737 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41741 \begin_layout Standard
41743 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41744 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41745 The submenu allows you to insert
41748 \begin_layout Description
41750 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41755 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41758 \begin_layout Description
41760 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41762 \begin_inset space ~
41766 \begin_inset space ~
41769 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41773 \begin_layout Description
41775 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41777 \begin_inset space ~
41780 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41783 \begin_layout Description
41785 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41790 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41793 \begin_layout Description
41795 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41797 \begin_inset space ~
41801 \begin_inset space ~
41804 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41808 \begin_layout Description
41810 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41815 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41818 \begin_layout Description
41820 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41833 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41836 \begin_layout Description
41838 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41840 \begin_inset space ~
41843 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41845 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41846 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41852 \begin_layout Description
41854 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41859 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41861 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41862 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41868 \begin_layout Description
41870 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41871 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41872 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41873 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41876 \begin_layout Subsection
41879 List/Contents/References
41882 \begin_layout Standard
41883 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41887 \begin_inset space ~
41908 are described in section
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41915 reference "sec:toc"
41924 is described in section
41925 \begin_inset space ~
41929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41931 reference "sec:Index"
41939 is described in section
41940 \begin_inset space ~
41944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41946 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41952 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41955 is described in section
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41962 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
41969 \begin_layout Subsection
41973 \begin_layout Standard
41974 To insert floats, as described in section
41975 \begin_inset space ~
41979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41981 reference "sec:Floats"
41985 and in detail the chapter
41992 \begin_inset space ~
42000 \begin_layout Subsection
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42005 To insert notes, described in section
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42012 reference "sec:Notes"
42019 \begin_layout Subsection
42023 \begin_layout Standard
42024 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42026 Branches are described in section
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42033 reference "sec:Branches"
42040 \begin_layout Subsection
42044 \begin_layout Standard
42045 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42046 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42048 An example is the document class
42049 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42059 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42068 with three custom insets.
42071 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42075 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42081 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42084 \begin_layout Subsection
42086 \begin_inset Index idx
42089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42098 \begin_layout Standard
42099 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42101 For more information see chapter
42103 External Document Parts
42106 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_layout Subsection
42114 \begin_inset Index idx
42117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42126 \begin_layout Standard
42127 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42128 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42135 \begin_inset space ~
42143 \begin_layout Subsection
42147 \begin_layout Standard
42152 dialog as described in section
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42159 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42166 \begin_layout Subsection
42170 \begin_layout Standard
42175 as described in section
42176 \begin_inset space ~
42180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42182 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42189 \begin_layout Subsection
42193 \begin_layout Standard
42198 as described in section
42199 \begin_inset space ~
42203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42205 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42212 \begin_layout Subsection
42214 \begin_inset Index idx
42217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42224 \begin_inset Index idx
42227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42236 \begin_layout Standard
42237 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42238 Floats are described in section
42239 \begin_inset space ~
42243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42245 reference "sec:Floats"
42249 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42252 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42268 \begin_layout Subsection
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42273 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42274 \begin_inset space ~
42278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42280 reference "sec:Index"
42287 \begin_layout Subsection
42291 \begin_layout Standard
42292 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42293 \begin_inset space ~
42297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42299 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42306 \begin_layout Subsection
42310 \begin_layout Standard
42311 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42312 Tables are described in section
42313 \begin_inset space ~
42317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42319 reference "sec:Tables"
42323 and in detail in the chapter
42330 \begin_inset space ~
42338 \begin_layout Subsection
42342 \begin_layout Standard
42348 Graphics are described in section
42349 \begin_inset space ~
42353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42355 reference "sec:Graphics"
42362 \begin_layout Subsection
42366 \begin_layout Standard
42367 Inserts a URL as described in section
42368 \begin_inset space ~
42372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42374 reference "subsec:URLs"
42381 \begin_layout Subsection
42385 \begin_layout Standard
42386 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42387 \begin_inset space ~
42391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42393 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42400 \begin_layout Subsection
42404 \begin_layout Standard
42405 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42406 \begin_inset space ~
42410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42412 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42419 \begin_layout Subsection
42423 \begin_layout Standard
42424 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42425 \begin_inset space ~
42429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42431 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42438 \begin_layout Subsection
42441 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42444 \begin_layout Standard
42445 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42446 environments of the same type.
42448 \begin_inset space ~
42452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42454 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42458 for an explanation.
42461 \begin_layout Subsection
42465 \begin_layout Standard
42466 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42467 title or caption of a float.
42468 Inserts a short title as described in section
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42475 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42482 \begin_layout Subsection
42487 \begin_layout Standard
42488 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42489 Code box as described in section
42490 \begin_inset space ~
42494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42496 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42503 \begin_layout Subsection
42505 \begin_inset Index idx
42508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42517 \begin_layout Standard
42518 Inserts a program listings box.
42519 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42521 Program Code Listings
42526 \begin_inset space ~
42534 \begin_layout Subsection
42536 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42540 \begin_layout Standard
42542 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42543 Inserts the actual date.
42544 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42551 \begin_layout Subsection
42555 \begin_layout Standard
42556 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42557 \begin_inset space ~
42561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42563 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42570 \begin_layout Section
42572 \begin_inset Index idx
42575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42584 \begin_layout Standard
42585 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42586 \begin_inset space ~
42589 of the current document.
42590 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42593 \begin_layout Subsection
42597 \begin_layout Standard
42598 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42599 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42600 to jump, for example, between section
42601 \begin_inset space ~
42605 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42606 \begin_inset space ~
42609 2.5 and use the submenu
42612 \begin_inset space ~
42616 \begin_inset space ~
42623 \begin_inset space ~
42629 \begin_inset space ~
42633 \begin_inset space ~
42639 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42643 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42649 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42652 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42655 \begin_layout Standard
42656 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42660 \begin_inset space ~
42665 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42668 \begin_inset space ~
42673 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42676 \begin_layout Subsection
42677 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42680 \begin_layout Standard
42681 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42685 \begin_layout Subsection
42689 \begin_layout Standard
42690 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42691 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42692 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42696 \begin_inset space ~
42700 \begin_inset space ~
42708 \begin_layout Subsection
42712 \begin_layout Standard
42713 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42716 The \SpecialChar LyX
42717 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42719 \begin_inset space ~
42727 \begin_inset space ~
42732 manual for a detailed description.
42735 \begin_layout Section
42737 \begin_inset Index idx
42740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42749 \begin_layout Subsection
42753 \begin_layout Standard
42754 Change Tracking is described in section
42755 \begin_inset space ~
42759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42761 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42768 \begin_layout Subsection
42776 \begin_layout Standard
42777 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42778 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42779 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42781 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42782 to the clipboard or update the view.
42783 \begin_inset Newline newline
42786 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42790 \begin_layout Standard
42793 Open Containing Directory
42795 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42796 's temporary folder for the document.
42797 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42798 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42799 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42800 For example some journals require to send the
42804 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42808 \begin_layout Subsection
42809 Start Appendix Here
42812 \begin_layout Standard
42813 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42814 as described in section
42815 \begin_inset space ~
42819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42821 reference "sec:Appendices"
42828 \begin_layout Subsection
42830 \begin_inset space ~
42836 \begin_layout Standard
42837 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42838 default output format for the document (menu
42840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42842 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42854 \begin_inset space ~
42858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42860 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42864 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42867 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42868 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42873 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42875 \begin_inset space ~
42878 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42880 \begin_inset space ~
42884 \begin_inset space ~
42890 \begin_inset space ~
42894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42896 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42900 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
42901 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
42903 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42904 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42906 \begin_inset space ~
42909 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42911 \begin_inset space ~
42914 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42918 \begin_inset space ~
42922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42924 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42929 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
42930 when it is first configured.
42931 The default output format is
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42942 \begin_layout Subsection
42943 View (Other Formats)
42946 \begin_layout Standard
42947 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
42948 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
42949 actual document with an external program.
42950 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
42951 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42952 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
42954 All possible formats are listed in section
42955 \begin_inset space ~
42959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42961 reference "subsec:Export"
42966 You should at least see the menu entry
42971 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42973 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
42975 \begin_inset space ~
42979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42981 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42986 \begin_inset Index idx
42989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42990 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42999 \begin_layout Standard
43000 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43001 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43003 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43004 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43006 \begin_inset space ~
43009 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43011 \begin_inset space ~
43014 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43018 \begin_inset space ~
43022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43024 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43029 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43030 when it is first configured.
43033 \begin_layout Subsection
43035 \begin_inset space ~
43041 \begin_layout Standard
43042 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43043 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43046 \begin_layout Subsection
43047 Update (Other Formats)
43050 \begin_layout Standard
43051 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43052 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43055 \begin_layout Subsection
43056 View Master Document
43059 \begin_layout Standard
43060 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43076 \begin_inset space ~
43081 manual for more information on this topic).
43082 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43083 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43091 \begin_inset space ~
43096 generates the output of the whole book, while
43100 will just output the chapter alone.
43103 \begin_layout Standard
43104 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43105 in the document settings (menu
43107 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43108 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43109 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43111 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_inset space ~
43121 \begin_inset space ~
43125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43127 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43131 ) or in the preferences (menu
43133 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43134 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43136 \begin_inset space ~
43139 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43141 \begin_inset space ~
43144 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43146 \begin_inset space ~
43150 \begin_inset space ~
43156 \begin_inset space ~
43160 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43162 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43169 \begin_layout Subsection
43170 Update Master Document
43173 \begin_layout Standard
43174 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43190 \begin_inset space ~
43195 manual for more information on this topic).
43196 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43197 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43200 \begin_layout Standard
43201 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43202 in the document settings (menu
43204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43205 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43206 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43212 \begin_inset space ~
43218 \begin_inset space ~
43222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43224 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43228 ) or in the preferences (menu
43230 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43231 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43236 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43238 \begin_inset space ~
43241 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43247 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_inset space ~
43257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43259 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43266 \begin_layout Subsection
43268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43270 name "subsec:Compressed"
43277 \begin_layout Standard
43278 Un/compresses the current document.
43279 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43280 compression (see the
43282 Additional Features
43284 manual for details).
43287 \begin_layout Subsection
43291 \begin_layout Standard
43292 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43295 \begin_layout Subsection
43299 \begin_layout Standard
43300 The document settings are described in appendix
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43307 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43314 \begin_layout Section
43316 \begin_inset Index idx
43319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 \begin_layout Subsection
43332 \begin_layout Standard
43333 Spell checking is explained in section
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43340 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43347 \begin_layout Subsection
43351 \begin_layout Standard
43352 The thesaurus is described in section
43353 \begin_inset space ~
43357 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43359 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43366 \begin_layout Subsection
43368 \begin_inset Index idx
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43378 \begin_inset Index idx
43381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43390 \begin_layout Standard
43391 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43392 the highlighted document part.
43395 \begin_layout Subsection
43401 \begin_inset Index idx
43404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43405 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43414 \begin_layout Standard
43415 Generates with the help of the program
43417 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43420 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43421 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43422 This feature is not available on Windows.
43425 \begin_layout Subsection
43431 \begin_inset Index idx
43434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43445 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43450 \begin_inset space ~
43455 to see the full filename paths.
43458 \begin_layout Subsection
43460 \begin_inset Index idx
43463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43472 \begin_layout Standard
43473 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43474 files as described in section
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43481 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43488 \begin_layout Subsection
43490 \begin_inset Index idx
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43506 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43524 \begin_inset Index idx
43527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43528 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43537 \begin_layout Standard
43538 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43539 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43540 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43541 -packages and programs it needs; see
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43549 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43556 \begin_layout Subsection
43560 \begin_layout Standard
43565 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43566 \begin_inset space ~
43570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43572 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43579 \begin_layout Section
43581 \begin_inset Index idx
43584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43593 \begin_layout Standard
43594 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43595 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43597 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43601 \begin_layout Standard
43605 \begin_inset space ~
43610 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43611 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43612 packages and classes found
43613 by \SpecialChar LyX
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43621 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43628 \begin_layout Standard
43632 \begin_inset space ~
43637 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43642 \begin_layout Section
43644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43646 name "sec:Toolbars"
43653 \begin_layout Standard
43654 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43661 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43668 \begin_layout Standard
43669 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43670 This is described in the
43672 Additional Features
43677 \begin_layout Subsection
43679 \begin_inset Index idx
43682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43691 \begin_layout Standard
43692 \begin_inset Graphics
43693 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43701 \begin_layout Standard
43702 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43708 \begin_layout Standard
43709 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43726 \begin_inset Note Note
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43730 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43735 manual for more information.
43743 \begin_layout Standard
43744 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43750 \begin_layout Standard
43751 \begin_inset Tabular
43752 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43753 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43754 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43755 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43761 \begin_inset Graphics
43762 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43776 pull-down box for the environments
43789 \begin_layout Standard
43790 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43796 \begin_layout Standard
43798 \begin_inset Tabular
43799 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43800 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43801 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43802 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43803 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43826 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43856 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43863 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43886 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43893 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43902 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
43910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43916 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43923 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43932 arg "spelling-continuously"
43940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43944 Spellcheck continuously
43950 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43980 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44003 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44010 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44033 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44070 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44095 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44100 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44109 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44118 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44132 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44151 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44158 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44172 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44215 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44243 Emphasize text, function of the
44244 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44247 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44249 \begin_inset space ~
44252 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44254 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44260 arg "dialog-show character"
44271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44292 Set text to noun style, function of the
44293 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44296 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44298 \begin_inset space ~
44301 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44309 arg "dialog-show character"
44320 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44329 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44342 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44345 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44363 arg "textstyle-apply"
44373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44378 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44379 Format text using the current settings in the
44381 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44386 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44397 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44421 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44423 \begin_inset space ~
44432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44441 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44455 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44469 arg "tabular-insert"
44477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44496 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44499 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44512 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44515 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44531 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44543 Toggle outline window on/off,
44545 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44561 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44573 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44600 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44613 \begin_layout Subsection
44615 \begin_inset Index idx
44618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44627 \begin_layout Standard
44628 \begin_inset Graphics
44629 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44637 \begin_layout Standard
44638 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44644 \begin_layout Standard
44645 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44649 \begin_layout Standard
44650 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44656 \begin_layout Standard
44657 \begin_inset Tabular
44658 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44659 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44660 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44661 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44689 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44698 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44725 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44743 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44752 arg "layout-toggle List"
44760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44779 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44797 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44806 arg "depth-increment"
44814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44820 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44844 arg "depth-decrement"
44852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44858 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44860 \begin_inset space ~
44864 \begin_inset space ~
44873 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44882 arg "float-insert figure"
44890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44896 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44897 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44913 arg "float-insert table"
44921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44927 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44928 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
44935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44958 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
44982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44995 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45004 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45018 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45050 \begin_inset space ~
45059 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45068 arg "nomencl-insert"
45076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45082 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45084 \begin_inset space ~
45093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45102 arg "footnote-insert"
45110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45123 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45132 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45146 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45148 \begin_inset space ~
45157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45181 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45183 \begin_inset space ~
45192 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45201 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45295 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45310 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45326 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45341 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45352 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 arg "dialog-show character"
45369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45377 \begin_inset space ~
45380 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45387 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45393 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45398 arg "textstyle-apply"
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45411 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45412 Format text using the recent settings in the
45415 arg "dialog-show character"
45424 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45433 arg "layout-paragraph"
45441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45449 \begin_inset space ~
45458 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45467 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45495 \begin_layout Subsection
45496 View/Update Toolbar
45497 \begin_inset Index idx
45500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45501 Toolbar ! View / Update
45509 \begin_layout Standard
45510 \begin_inset Graphics
45511 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45518 \begin_layout Standard
45519 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45525 \begin_layout Standard
45526 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45530 \begin_layout Standard
45531 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45537 \begin_layout Standard
45538 \begin_inset Tabular
45539 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45540 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45541 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45542 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45566 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45582 arg "buffer-update"
45590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45612 arg "master-buffer-view"
45620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45626 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45628 \begin_inset space ~
45637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45646 arg "master-buffer-update"
45654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45662 \begin_inset space ~
45666 \begin_inset space ~
45675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45684 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45699 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45700 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
45701 Synchronize with Output
45707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45718 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45735 View (Other Formats)
45741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45748 arg "update-others"
45752 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45767 Update (Other Formats)
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45782 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45783 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45789 \begin_layout Subsection
45793 \begin_layout Standard
45794 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45795 \begin_inset space ~
45799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45801 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45805 , the table toolbar
45806 \begin_inset Index idx
45809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 \begin_inset space ~
45823 manual and the math macro toolbar
45824 \begin_inset Index idx
45827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45840 \begin_layout Chapter
45841 The Document Settings
45842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45844 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45849 \begin_inset Index idx
45852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45853 Document ! Settings
45861 \begin_layout Standard
45865 \begin_inset space ~
45870 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45871 is called with the menu
45873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45877 You can save your document settings as default with the
45879 Save as Document Defaults
45881 button in any dialog.
45882 This will create a template named
45886 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
45887 when you create a new document without
45891 \begin_layout Standard
45896 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
45897 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
45900 \begin_layout Standard
45901 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
45902 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
45903 to find the one you are looking for.
45904 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
45905 the submenus of the dialog.
45907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45911 \begin_inset space \space{}
45915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45922 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
45923 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
45924 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
45927 \begin_layout Section
45931 \begin_layout Standard
45932 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
45934 Document classes are described in section
45935 \begin_inset space ~
45939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45941 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
45949 \begin_layout Standard
45953 \begin_inset space ~
45958 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
45963 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
45964 as a layout for a document class.
45965 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
45967 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
45976 \begin_layout Standard
45977 Some classes use special class options by default.
45978 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
45982 and you can decide to use them or not.
45983 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
45984 recommended you leave them untouched.
45989 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45990 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
45995 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45997 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46003 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46004 \begin_inset Newline newline
46009 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46012 \begin_inset Newline newline
46015 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46016 distribution, see section
46021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46023 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46036 \begin_layout Standard
46041 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46042 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46043 in the background if the child document
46044 is opened without its master.
46045 This way child documents are always compilable.
46046 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46053 \begin_inset space ~
46061 \begin_layout Standard
46062 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46073 \begin_inset Index idx
46076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46078 packages ! prettyref
46084 \begin_inset Index idx
46087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46089 packages ! refstyle
46094 for cross-references, see section
46095 \begin_inset space ~
46099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46101 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46108 \begin_layout Section
46112 \begin_layout Standard
46113 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46114 Please refer to the section
46117 \begin_inset space ~
46125 \begin_inset space ~
46130 manual for details.
46133 \begin_layout Section
46137 \begin_layout Standard
46138 Modules are explained in section
46139 \begin_inset space ~
46143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46145 reference "subsec:Modules"
46152 \begin_layout Section
46156 \begin_layout Standard
46158 \begin_inset space ~
46162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46164 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46171 \begin_layout Section
46175 \begin_layout Standard
46176 The document font settings are described in section
46177 \begin_inset space ~
46181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46183 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46190 \begin_layout Section
46194 \begin_layout Standard
46195 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46207 \begin_inset space ~
46212 and whether it should be a
46215 \begin_inset space ~
46220 can also be specified here.
46223 \begin_layout Standard
46224 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46225 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46226 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46228 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46231 \begin_layout Standard
46234 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46237 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46238 justifies the text on screen.
46239 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46241 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46245 \begin_layout Standard
46247 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46256 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46261 \begin_layout Section
46265 \begin_layout Standard
46266 This dialog is described in sections
46267 \begin_inset space ~
46271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46273 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46280 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46287 \begin_layout Section
46291 \begin_layout Standard
46292 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46293 \begin_inset space ~
46297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46299 reference "subsec:Margins"
46306 \begin_layout Section
46308 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46310 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46315 \begin_inset Index idx
46318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46319 Language ! Encoding
46327 \begin_layout Standard
46328 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46329 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46330 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46332 is always encoded in utf8).
46333 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46334 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46335 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46336 -command is not known for
46337 a particular character).
46338 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46342 \begin_layout Standard
46344 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46345 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46346 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46347 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46348 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46349 's default encoding).
46350 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46351 's Unicode support covers the
46352 characters of most scripts.
46353 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46354 using one of the traditional, or
46355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46362 , encodings is necessary.
46365 \begin_layout Standard
46367 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46369 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46372 Traditional (auto-selected)
46378 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46379 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46380 the given language(s).
46382 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46386 \begin_layout Standard
46388 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46389 If you use the option
46394 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46397 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46398 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46401 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46404 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46405 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46406 exactly one encoding.
46407 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46412 \begin_layout Standard
46414 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46415 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46421 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46422 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46426 \begin_layout Standard
46428 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46429 Finally, you can also select
46433 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46434 Note that this encoding is then used for
46439 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46440 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46444 \begin_layout Standard
46446 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46449 Do not load inputenc
46451 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46452 from automatically loading the
46459 \begin_inset Index idx
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46466 packages ! inputenc
46474 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46475 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46476 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46477 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46478 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46480 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46486 Traditional (auto-selected)
46493 \begin_layout Standard
46495 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46497 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46498 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46499 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46500 installation supports Unicode), choose
46501 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46502 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46503 is quite incomplete, so
46504 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46509 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46510 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46511 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46512 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46513 -commands is not used, because all
46514 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46515 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46516 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46517 , two new alternative engines
46518 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46520 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46522 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46525 \begin_inset space ~
46533 \begin_inset space ~
46541 \begin_inset space ~
46547 \begin_inset space ~
46551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46553 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46558 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46562 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46567 \begin_layout Standard
46571 \begin_inset space ~
46576 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46577 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46587 The possible settings are:
46590 \begin_layout Description
46591 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46593 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46594 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46598 \begin_inset space ~
46602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46604 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46611 \begin_layout Description
46612 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46613 format you will use.
46614 In many cases this will be
46619 \begin_inset Index idx
46622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46630 If the newer package
46635 \begin_inset Index idx
46638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46640 packages ! polyglossia
46645 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46646 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46647 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46649 this package will be used instead of
46656 \begin_layout Description
46658 \begin_inset space ~
46669 would be more appropriate.
46672 \begin_layout Description
46673 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46674 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46678 (for German texts), type in
46681 \begin_inset Newline newline
46686 usepackage{ngerman}
46689 \begin_layout Description
46690 None will not use a language package.
46691 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46694 \begin_layout Standard
46695 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46698 \begin_layout Description
46700 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46702 \begin_inset space ~
46706 \begin_inset space ~
46710 \begin_inset space ~
46717 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46723 \begin_inset Index idx
46726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46728 packages ! inputenc
46734 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46735 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46736 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46742 \begin_layout Description
46743 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46745 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46746 commands, which may result in a big
46747 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46748 -commands are needed.
46750 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46751 This is the same as the
46764 \begin_layout Description
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46773 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46776 \begin_layout Description
46778 \begin_inset space ~
46782 \begin_inset space ~
46785 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46788 \begin_layout Description
46790 \begin_inset space ~
46793 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46796 \begin_layout Description
46798 \begin_inset space ~
46802 \begin_inset space ~
46805 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46806 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46809 \begin_layout Description
46811 \begin_inset space ~
46815 \begin_inset space ~
46818 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46822 \begin_layout Description
46824 \begin_inset space ~
46828 \begin_inset space ~
46831 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46832 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46835 \begin_layout Description
46837 \begin_inset space ~
46841 \begin_inset space ~
46845 \begin_inset space ~
46848 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46849 \begin_inset space ~
46855 \begin_layout Description
46857 \begin_inset space ~
46861 \begin_inset space ~
46865 \begin_inset space ~
46868 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46869 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46872 \begin_layout Description
46874 \begin_inset space ~
46878 \begin_inset space ~
46881 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
46882 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
46883 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46884 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
46885 \begin_inset space ~
46889 \begin_inset space ~
46895 \begin_layout Description
46897 \begin_inset space ~
46901 \begin_inset space ~
46904 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
46905 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
46906 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46908 should try to use the encoding Unicode
46909 \begin_inset space ~
46913 \begin_inset space ~
46919 \begin_layout Description
46921 \begin_inset space ~
46925 \begin_inset space ~
46928 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
46931 \begin_layout Description
46933 \begin_inset space ~
46937 \begin_inset space ~
46940 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
46943 \begin_layout Description
46945 \begin_inset space ~
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46952 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
46955 \begin_layout Description
46957 \begin_inset space ~
46960 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
46963 \begin_layout Description
46965 \begin_inset space ~
46968 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
46971 \begin_layout Description
46973 \begin_inset space ~
46977 \begin_inset space ~
46980 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
46983 \begin_layout Description
46985 \begin_inset space ~
46989 \begin_inset space ~
46995 \begin_layout Description
46997 \begin_inset space ~
47001 \begin_inset space ~
47004 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47007 \begin_layout Description
47009 \begin_inset space ~
47013 \begin_inset space ~
47019 \begin_layout Description
47021 \begin_inset space ~
47025 \begin_inset space ~
47028 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47034 \begin_inset Index idx
47037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47044 , when using this, set the document language to
47049 \begin_layout Description
47051 \begin_inset space ~
47055 \begin_inset space ~
47058 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47063 , when using this, set the document language to
47066 \begin_inset space ~
47072 \begin_layout Description
47074 \begin_inset space ~
47078 \begin_inset space ~
47081 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47087 \begin_inset Index idx
47090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47092 packages ! japanese
47097 , when using this, set the document language to
47102 \begin_layout Description
47104 \begin_inset space ~
47108 \begin_inset space ~
47111 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47116 , when using this, set the document language to
47121 \begin_layout Description
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47127 \begin_inset space ~
47130 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47135 , when using this, set the document language to
47140 \begin_layout Description
47142 \begin_inset space ~
47145 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47148 \begin_layout Description
47150 \begin_inset space ~
47154 \begin_inset space ~
47158 \begin_inset space ~
47161 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47164 \begin_layout Description
47166 \begin_inset space ~
47170 \begin_inset space ~
47174 \begin_inset space ~
47177 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47178 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47179 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47182 \begin_layout Description
47184 \begin_inset space ~
47188 \begin_inset space ~
47194 \begin_layout Description
47196 \begin_inset space ~
47200 \begin_inset space ~
47203 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47204 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47207 \begin_layout Description
47209 \begin_inset space ~
47213 \begin_inset space ~
47216 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47222 \begin_inset Index idx
47225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47232 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47233 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47235 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47236 with the default encoding (
47238 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47244 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47245 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47250 \begin_layout Description
47252 \begin_inset space ~
47260 \begin_inset space ~
47263 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47270 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47273 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47280 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47281 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47283 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47286 \begin_layout Description
47288 \begin_inset space ~
47292 \begin_inset space ~
47295 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47301 \begin_inset Index idx
47304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47312 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47315 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47317 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47318 This used to be more comprehensive than
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47326 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47331 \begin_layout Description
47333 \begin_inset space ~
47336 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47342 \begin_inset Index idx
47345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47347 packages ! inputenc
47354 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47355 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47357 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47358 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47359 with the default encoding (
47361 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47367 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47368 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47373 \begin_layout Description
47375 \begin_inset space ~
47379 \begin_inset space ~
47383 \begin_inset space ~
47386 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47387 \begin_inset space ~
47393 \begin_layout Description
47395 \begin_inset space ~
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47403 \begin_inset space ~
47406 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47407 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47408 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47412 \begin_layout Description
47414 \begin_inset space ~
47418 \begin_inset space ~
47422 \begin_inset space ~
47425 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47426 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47429 \begin_layout Section
47431 \begin_inset Index idx
47434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47441 \begin_inset Index idx
47444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47451 \begin_inset Index idx
47454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47455 Color ! Shaded boxes
47461 \begin_inset Index idx
47464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47465 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47473 \begin_layout Standard
47474 Here you can alter the font color for the
47478 (default: black), for
47481 \begin_inset space ~
47486 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47490 (default: white) and for
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47503 sets the color back to the default.
47506 \begin_layout Standard
47507 Clicking any button showing
47515 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47516 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47517 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47518 later more quickly.
47521 \begin_layout Standard
47522 Note, if you change the
47525 \begin_inset space ~
47530 font color and use the option
47533 \begin_inset space ~
47538 in the document settings under
47541 \begin_inset space ~
47546 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47547 \begin_inset space ~
47551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47553 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47560 \begin_layout Standard
47561 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47567 \begin_layout Standard
47571 \begin_inset space ~
47580 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47583 \begin_inset space ~
47586 Code after a forced page break:
47589 \begin_layout Itemize
47590 For the page color:
47591 \begin_inset Newline newline
47598 pagecolor{color name}
47601 \begin_layout Itemize
47602 For the text color:
47603 \begin_inset Newline newline
47613 \begin_layout Standard
47614 You are restricted to one of
47650 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47657 \begin_inset space ~
47663 \begin_inset Newline newline
47666 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47667 names to refer to them:
47670 \begin_layout Itemize
47676 \begin_inset Newline newline
47681 page_backgroundcolor
47684 \begin_layout Itemize
47688 \begin_inset space ~
47694 \begin_inset Newline newline
47702 \begin_layout Itemize
47706 \begin_inset space ~
47712 \begin_inset Newline newline
47720 \begin_layout Itemize
47724 \begin_inset space ~
47730 \begin_inset Newline newline
47738 \begin_layout Standard
47739 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47750 \begin_inset space ~
47758 \begin_layout Section
47760 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47764 \begin_layout Standard
47766 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47767 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47774 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47782 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47783 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47786 \begin_layout Standard
47788 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47789 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47791 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47794 \begin_layout Section
47798 \begin_layout Standard
47799 Here you can adjust the
47803 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47807 as described in section
47808 \begin_inset space ~
47812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47814 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47819 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47823 \begin_layout Standard
47825 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47826 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47828 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47829 of this package can be used as well.
47830 The most common one are:
47833 \begin_layout Description
47835 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47836 right Line numbers to the right margin
47839 \begin_layout Description
47841 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47842 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47846 \begin_layout Description
47848 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47849 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47852 \begin_layout Description
47854 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620780
47855 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47858 \begin_layout Description
47860 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47862 \begin_inset space ~
47865 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
47870 \begin_layout Section
47874 \begin_layout Standard
47875 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47881 \begin_inset Index idx
47884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47886 packages ! biblatex
47896 \begin_inset Index idx
47899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47911 \begin_inset Index idx
47914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47922 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47925 Sectioned bibliography
47927 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47933 \begin_inset Index idx
47936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47938 packages ! bibtopic
47948 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
47949 Finally, you can select a document-specific
47953 for the generation of the bibliography.
47954 For a further description of these possibilities see section
47955 \begin_inset space ~
47959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
47968 \begin_layout Section
47972 \begin_layout Standard
47973 Here you can define the
47977 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
47979 \begin_inset space ~
47983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47985 reference "sec:Index"
47992 \begin_layout Section
47996 \begin_layout Standard
47997 The PDF properties are explained in section
47998 \begin_inset space ~
48002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48004 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48011 \begin_layout Section
48015 \begin_layout Standard
48016 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48017 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48023 \begin_inset Index idx
48026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48038 \begin_inset Index idx
48041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48053 \begin_inset Index idx
48056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48068 \begin_inset Index idx
48071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48083 \begin_inset Index idx
48086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48088 packages ! mathdots
48098 \begin_inset Index idx
48101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48103 packages ! mathtools
48113 \begin_inset Index idx
48116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48128 \begin_inset Index idx
48131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48133 packages ! stackrel
48143 \begin_inset Index idx
48146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48148 packages ! stmaryrd
48158 \begin_inset Index idx
48161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48163 packages ! undertilde
48168 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48171 \begin_layout Description
48172 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48173 -errors in formulas,
48174 ensure that you have this enabled.
48177 \begin_layout Description
48178 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48179 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48180 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48184 \begin_layout Description
48185 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48200 \begin_layout Description
48201 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48204 \begin_inset space ~
48216 \begin_layout Description
48217 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48228 \begin_layout Description
48229 mathtools is used for the math commands
48265 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48272 \begin_layout Description
48273 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48275 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48284 \begin_layout Description
48285 stackrel is used for the math command
48302 \begin_layout Description
48303 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48306 \begin_layout Description
48307 undertilde is used for the math command
48315 Accents for one Character
48324 \begin_layout Section
48326 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48328 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48334 \begin_layout Standard
48336 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48337 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48340 \begin_layout Standard
48342 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48343 The float placement options
48344 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48347 are described in the section
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48354 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48356 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48364 \begin_inset space ~
48372 \begin_layout Section
48376 \begin_layout Standard
48377 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48379 Program Code Listings
48384 \begin_inset space ~
48392 \begin_layout Section
48396 \begin_layout Standard
48397 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48405 set to be used and set the
48410 The itemize environment is described in section
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48417 reference "sec:Itemize"
48424 \begin_layout Standard
48425 You can furthermore specify a
48428 \begin_inset space ~
48433 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48434 command of the desired character.
48435 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48442 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48444 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48448 \begin_inset space \space{}
48452 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48462 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48463 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48466 \begin_layout Standard
48467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48475 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48476 -packages in the preamble (menu
48479 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48480 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48483 \begin_inset space ~
48489 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48493 usepackage{textcomp}
48496 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48500 usepackage{amssymb}
48510 \begin_layout Section
48514 \begin_layout Standard
48515 Branches are described in section
48516 \begin_inset space ~
48520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48522 reference "sec:Branches"
48529 \begin_layout Section
48531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48533 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48540 \begin_layout Standard
48541 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48544 \begin_layout Description
48546 \begin_inset space ~
48550 \begin_inset space ~
48553 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48573 View Master Document
48574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48581 Update Master Document
48582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48589 menu or the toolbar.
48590 The default is set in
48592 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48593 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48595 \begin_inset space ~
48598 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48602 \begin_inset space ~
48606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48608 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48615 \begin_layout Description
48617 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48619 \begin_inset space ~
48623 \begin_inset space ~
48627 \begin_inset space ~
48630 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48635 option which is needed with some packages.
48636 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48637 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48640 \begin_layout Description
48642 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48648 \begin_inset space ~
48651 Options offers settings for the
48659 \begin_layout Itemize
48663 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48665 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48667 \begin_inset space ~
48673 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48675 \begin_inset space ~
48679 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48685 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48687 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48688 settings for the menu
48690 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48694 \begin_inset space ~
48698 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48701 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48702 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48707 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48709 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48711 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48714 or a detailed description see section
48716 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48721 \begin_inset space ~
48727 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48731 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48735 \begin_layout Itemize
48737 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48740 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48742 determines whether so-called
48743 \begin_inset Quotes els
48747 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48751 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48753 \begin_inset Quotes els
48757 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48760 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48761 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48762 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48764 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48766 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48767 macros, you can uncheck this.
48768 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48775 \begin_layout Description
48777 \begin_inset space ~
48781 \begin_inset space ~
48784 Options offers settings for the export format
48792 \begin_inset space ~
48797 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48801 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48805 \begin_inset space ~
48810 settings are described in detail in section
48812 Math Output in XHTML
48817 \begin_inset space ~
48826 \begin_inset space ~
48830 \begin_inset space ~
48835 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48838 \begin_layout Description
48840 \begin_inset space ~
48845 Save transient properties
48847 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48848 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48849 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48853 \begin_layout Itemize
48854 the activation of change tracking
48857 \begin_layout Itemize
48858 the output of tracked changes
48861 \begin_layout Itemize
48862 the recording of the document directory path.
48865 \begin_layout Standard
48866 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48867 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
48871 \begin_layout Section
48879 \begin_layout Standard
48880 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48882 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
48884 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48886 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
48890 \begin_layout Standard
48891 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48892 -syntax is given in section
48893 \begin_inset space ~
48897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48899 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
48906 \begin_layout Chapter
48912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48914 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
48919 \begin_inset Index idx
48922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48931 \begin_layout Standard
48932 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
48934 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48938 It has the following submenus.
48941 \begin_layout Section
48945 \begin_layout Subsection
48949 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48950 User Interface File
48951 \begin_inset Index idx
48954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48955 Customization ! of toolbars
48961 \begin_inset Index idx
48964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48965 Customization ! of menus
48973 \begin_layout Standard
48974 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
48975 interface (ui) file.
48976 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
48984 \begin_layout Description
48989 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
48992 \begin_layout Description
48999 the menu entries in popup context menus
49002 \begin_layout Description
49007 specifies the toolbar buttons
49010 \begin_layout Standard
49011 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49012 and edit the entries.
49015 \begin_layout Standard
49016 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49028 entries must be finished with an explicit
49053 and in the case of the
49054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49066 The syntax for the entries is:
49069 \begin_layout Standard
49070 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49099 \begin_layout Standard
49101 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49104 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49105 -functions are listed in the menu
49107 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49109 \begin_inset space ~
49117 \begin_layout Standard
49118 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49124 \begin_layout Standard
49125 For example, assuming you use the menu
49127 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49130 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49134 \begin_layout Standard
49135 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49159 \begin_layout Standard
49161 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49176 to have the sixth bookmark.
49179 \begin_layout Standard
49183 \begin_inset space ~
49188 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49189 's toolbar buttons.
49190 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49194 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49202 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49206 \begin_layout Standard
49209 Enable tool tips in main work area
49211 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49215 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49219 \begin_layout Standard
49224 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49225 should display in the menu
49227 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49229 \begin_inset space ~
49237 \begin_layout Subsection
49241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49245 \begin_layout Standard
49248 Restore window layouts and geometries
49251 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49252 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49256 \begin_layout Standard
49259 Restore cursor positions
49261 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49265 \begin_layout Standard
49268 Load opened files from last session
49270 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49274 \begin_layout Standard
49277 Clear all session information
49279 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49280 sessions (cursor positions, names
49281 of last opened documents, etc.).
49284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49286 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49288 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49293 \begin_inset Index idx
49296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49305 \begin_layout Standard
49308 Backup original documents when saving
49310 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49311 it was saved the last time.
49312 It is stored in the
49315 \begin_inset space ~
49321 \begin_inset space ~
49325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49327 reference "sec:Paths"
49331 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49334 \begin_inset space ~
49340 The backup file has the file extension
49341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49355 \begin_layout Standard
49358 Backup documents, every
49360 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49363 \begin_layout Standard
49366 Save documents compressed by default
49368 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49369 \begin_inset space ~
49373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49375 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49380 This applies to newly created documents only.
49381 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49384 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49385 Windows & work area
49388 \begin_layout Standard
49391 Open documents in tabs
49393 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49397 \begin_layout Standard
49402 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49409 \begin_inset space ~
49413 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49415 reference "sec:Paths"
49419 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49426 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49427 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49428 of \SpecialChar LyX
49430 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49431 instance is created for each file.
49434 \begin_layout Standard
49437 Single close-tab button
49439 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49449 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49450 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49451 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49455 \begin_layout Standard
49456 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49464 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49465 before the change takes effect.
49473 \begin_layout Standard
49478 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49480 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49482 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49486 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49487 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49488 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49491 \begin_layout Subsection
49493 \begin_inset Index idx
49496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49505 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49512 \begin_layout Standard
49513 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49517 \begin_layout Standard
49518 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49526 This section only deals with the fonts
49530 the \SpecialChar LyX
49532 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49535 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49536 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49547 \begin_layout Standard
49548 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49565 (depends on the system) as its
49568 \begin_inset space ~
49584 \begin_layout Standard
49585 You can change the font size with the
49592 \begin_layout Standard
49597 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49602 points have the size of 1
49603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49607 \begin_inset space ~
49611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49613 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49618 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49623 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49624 \begin_inset space ~
49628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49630 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49637 \begin_layout Subsection
49639 \begin_inset Index idx
49642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49643 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49650 \begin_inset Index idx
49653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49662 \begin_layout Standard
49663 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49664 by choosing an item in the
49665 list and selecting the
49672 \begin_layout Standard
49673 By checking the option
49677 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49680 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49681 \begin_inset space ~
49685 \begin_inset space ~
49690 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49693 \begin_layout Subsection
49695 \begin_inset Index idx
49698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49707 \begin_layout Standard
49708 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49712 \begin_layout Standard
49717 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49718 This feature is described in section
49719 \begin_inset space ~
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49725 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49732 \begin_layout Standard
49733 Checking the option
49736 \begin_inset space ~
49740 \begin_inset space ~
49744 \begin_inset space ~
49749 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49752 \begin_layout Section
49754 \begin_inset Index idx
49757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49766 \begin_layout Subsection
49770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49774 \begin_layout Standard
49777 Cursor follows scrollbar
49779 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49783 \begin_layout Standard
49784 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49785 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49786 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49789 \begin_layout Standard
49792 Scroll below end of document
49794 is self-explanatory.
49797 \begin_layout Standard
49798 In \SpecialChar LyX
49799 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49806 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49808 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49809 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49810 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49814 \begin_layout Standard
49816 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49819 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49821 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49822 paste operations (i.
49823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49826 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49827 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49828 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49829 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49830 dissolving from insets.
49835 \begin_layout Standard
49838 Sort environments alphabetically
49840 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49843 \begin_layout Standard
49846 Group environments by their category
49848 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49851 \begin_layout Standard
49856 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49871 \begin_layout Standard
49872 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
49877 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
49878 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
49882 \begin_layout Subsection
49884 \begin_inset Index idx
49887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49894 \begin_inset Index idx
49897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49898 Settings ! Shortcuts
49906 \begin_layout Standard
49911 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
49913 Several binding files are available, among them:
49916 \begin_layout Description
49917 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
49920 \begin_layout Description
49921 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
49933 \begin_layout Description
49934 mac.bind a set of bindings for
49937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49945 \begin_layout Standard
49946 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
49951 , and binding files for special languages.
49952 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
49953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49957 \begin_inset space \space{}
49961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49969 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
49970 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
49971 will try to use the appropriate binding
49975 \begin_layout Standard
49976 Some binding files, like
49980 , only have a limited scope.
49981 When looking at the end of the file
49985 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
49988 \begin_layout Standard
49992 \begin_inset space ~
49996 \begin_inset space ~
50001 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50002 in the selected key binding file.
50005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50009 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50014 \begin_inset Index idx
50017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50018 Key Bindings ! Editing
50026 \begin_layout Standard
50027 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50028 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50029 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50030 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50033 Show key-bindings containing
50036 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50037 Insert there for example as keyword
50038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50045 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50046 functions that contain
50047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50055 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50056 All \SpecialChar LyX
50057 functions are also listed in the file
50062 that you will find in the
50069 \begin_layout Standard
50070 For example, to add the shortcut
50078 , select the function and press the
50083 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50084 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50087 \begin_layout Standard
50088 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50089 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50091 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
50092 function names as a semicolon separated list.
50094 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50099 \begin_layout Standard
50100 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50103 \begin_layout Standard
50104 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50106 The syntax of the entries is:
50109 \begin_layout Standard
50115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50134 \begin_layout Standard
50135 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50136 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50164 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50165 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50166 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50167 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50169 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50173 , you needed to specify it as
50178 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50181 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50184 \begin_layout Subsection
50186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50188 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50193 \begin_inset Index idx
50196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50203 \begin_inset Index idx
50206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50207 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50215 \begin_layout Standard
50216 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50217 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50218 provides keyboard maps.
50219 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50220 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50223 \begin_inset space ~
50227 \begin_inset space ~
50232 and select the keyboard map file named
50239 \begin_layout Standard
50248 keyboard map and, if you use the
50252 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50255 arg "keymap-primary"
50261 arg "keymap-secondary"
50264 respectively or toggle between them with
50267 arg "keymap-toggle"
50273 \begin_layout Standard
50274 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50282 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50291 \begin_layout Standard
50292 You can also specify the mouse
50294 Wheel scrolling speed
50297 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50301 Middle mouse button pasting
50303 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50304 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50307 \begin_layout Standard
50315 \begin_inset space ~
50319 \begin_inset space ~
50324 you can select a key for zooming.
50325 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50328 \begin_layout Subsection
50332 \begin_layout Standard
50333 Input completion is described in section
50334 \begin_inset space ~
50338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50340 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50347 \begin_layout Section
50349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50356 \begin_inset Index idx
50359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50366 \begin_inset Index idx
50369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50378 \begin_layout Standard
50379 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50380 are normally determined during
50382 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50385 \begin_layout Description
50387 \begin_inset space ~
50390 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50391 's working directory.
50392 It is the default when you
50403 \begin_inset space ~
50411 \begin_layout Description
50413 \begin_inset space ~
50416 templates This directory
50417 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50418 contains the templates that are shown
50419 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50420 will be opened when you use the menu
50421 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50426 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50428 \begin_inset space ~
50432 \begin_inset space ~
50440 \begin_layout Description
50442 \begin_inset space ~
50445 files This directory
50446 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50447 will be opened when you use the
50448 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50449 contains the example files that are listed in
50452 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50461 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50463 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50465 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50471 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50473 \begin_inset Newline newline
50477 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50489 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50490 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50500 \begin_layout Description
50502 \begin_inset space ~
50506 \begin_inset Index idx
50509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50515 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50516 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50517 \begin_inset space ~
50521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50523 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50531 will be used to save the backups.
50532 \begin_inset Newline newline
50535 Backup files have the ending
50536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50546 \begin_layout Description
50548 \begin_inset space ~
50551 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50552 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50554 \begin_inset Newline newline
50561 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50567 You can edit this file with the program
50576 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50577 in its preferences under
50580 \begin_inset space ~
50586 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50591 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50593 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50594 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50600 and \SpecialChar LyX
50601 need to be running the same time.
50602 \begin_inset Newline newline
50605 The pipe is also used for the
50609 feature, see section
50610 \begin_inset space ~
50614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50616 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50621 \begin_inset Newline newline
50624 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50625 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50626 \begin_inset Newline newline
50642 \begin_layout Description
50644 \begin_inset space ~
50647 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50650 \begin_layout Description
50652 \begin_inset space ~
50655 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50656 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50657 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50660 \begin_layout Description
50662 \begin_inset space ~
50665 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50671 You only need to specify it if you are using
50675 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50677 For \SpecialChar LyX
50682 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50686 \begin_layout Description
50688 \begin_inset space ~
50691 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50692 When \SpecialChar LyX
50693 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50694 to find it on the system.
50695 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50697 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50706 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50707 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50710 \begin_layout Description
50712 \begin_inset space ~
50715 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50716 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50717 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50718 code or in the document
50720 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50722 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50723 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50724 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50725 scanned for the input files.
50726 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50727 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50729 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50730 compilation may fail for some documents.
50733 \begin_layout Section
50737 \begin_layout Standard
50738 Here you can insert your
50747 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50749 \begin_inset space ~
50753 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50755 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50759 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50762 \begin_layout Section
50764 \begin_inset Index idx
50767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50768 Language ! Settings
50774 \begin_inset Index idx
50777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50778 Settings ! Language
50786 \begin_layout Subsection
50788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50790 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50797 \begin_layout Description
50799 \begin_inset space ~
50803 \begin_inset space ~
50806 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
50808 You can find its actual translation status here:
50809 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50811 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
50817 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
50821 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50823 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
50824 LaTeX Language Support
50829 \begin_layout Description
50831 \begin_inset space ~
50834 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
50835 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
50836 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
50837 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
50838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50854 The most widespread language package is
50859 \begin_inset Index idx
50862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50869 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
50871 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
50872 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
50873 come with the alternative
50879 \begin_inset Index idx
50882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50884 packages ! polyglossia
50889 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
50890 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
50896 The available selections are described in section
50897 \begin_inset space ~
50901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50903 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
50910 \begin_layout Description
50912 \begin_inset space ~
50916 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
50917 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50918 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
50920 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
50924 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
50928 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
50930 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
50934 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
50935 that is used to switch to a different language
50936 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
50937 to start the package
50941 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
50942 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
50946 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
50947 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
50950 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50954 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50962 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
50970 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
50973 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
50975 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
50979 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
50997 selectlanguage{$$lang}
50998 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51005 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51006 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51011 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51016 , this setting is ignored.
51021 \begin_layout Description
51023 \begin_inset space ~
51027 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51034 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51035 Use this if the language switch set in
51039 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51043 's alternative command
51047 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51048 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51051 end{otherlanguage*}
51055 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51056 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51057 command toggles the package on and off
51058 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51059 Empty by default, as
51063 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51065 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51070 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51076 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51081 , this setting is ignored.
51086 \begin_layout Description
51088 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51090 \begin_inset space ~
51094 \begin_inset space ~
51097 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51101 \begin_layout Description
51103 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51105 \begin_inset space ~
51109 \begin_inset space ~
51112 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51118 \begin_layout Description
51120 \begin_inset space ~
51124 \begin_inset space ~
51128 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51130 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51133 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51134 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51137 to the document class options
51138 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51139 rather than the language package options.
51140 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51144 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51145 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51147 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51148 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51150 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51155 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51156 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51165 \begin_layout Description
51167 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51169 \begin_inset space ~
51173 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51175 \begin_inset space ~
51179 \begin_inset space ~
51183 \begin_inset space ~
51189 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51191 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51194 this option is set,
51195 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51196 the language switch defined in
51199 \begin_inset space ~
51204 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51205 to the document language.
51206 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51207 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51210 \begin_inset space ~
51215 or if a package resets the document language.
51216 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51217 usually should be the document language).
51218 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51219 documents start with the chosen document language.
51220 When this option is not set, the
51223 \begin_inset space ~
51228 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51230 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51233 \begin_inset space ~
51243 \begin_layout Description
51245 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51247 \begin_inset space ~
51251 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51253 \begin_inset space ~
51257 \begin_inset space ~
51261 \begin_inset space ~
51267 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51275 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51276 Set document language explicitly
51282 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51284 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51290 \begin_inset space ~
51296 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51298 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51302 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51304 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51307 the end of the document.
51308 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51313 \paragraph_spacing single
51315 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51321 \begin_layout Description
51323 \begin_inset space ~
51327 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51329 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51333 \begin_inset space ~
51337 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51339 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51341 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51345 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51348 in a language different
51349 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51351 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51354 the document language will be
51355 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51356 marked (by default with a blue
51359 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51361 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51365 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51369 \begin_layout Description
51371 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51373 \begin_inset space ~
51377 \begin_inset space ~
51381 \begin_inset space ~
51384 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51385 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51386 switched via the operating system.
51387 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51389 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51392 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51393 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51398 \begin_layout Description
51400 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51402 \begin_inset space ~
51406 \begin_inset space ~
51409 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51410 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51415 \begin_layout Description
51417 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51419 \begin_inset space ~
51423 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51425 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51429 \begin_inset space ~
51433 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51434 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51435 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51437 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51441 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51443 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51444 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51446 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51447 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51448 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51450 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51455 \begin_layout Standard
51460 means that the cursor
51461 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51462 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51463 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51468 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51469 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51473 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51475 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51476 specific case always means: move
51480 in text (even if this means:
51486 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51487 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51488 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51489 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51490 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51502 \begin_layout Standard
51504 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51509 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51510 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51511 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51515 ) when coming from the left.
51516 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51518 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51519 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51520 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51525 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51527 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51531 \begin_layout Description
51533 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51535 \begin_inset space ~
51539 \begin_inset space ~
51542 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51543 separator alignment).
51544 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51549 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51550 (static) custom character here.
51553 \begin_layout Description
51555 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51557 \begin_inset space ~
51561 \begin_inset space ~
51564 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51570 \begin_layout Subsection
51574 \begin_layout Standard
51575 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51576 \begin_inset space ~
51580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51582 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51589 \begin_layout Section
51593 \begin_layout Subsection
51595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51597 name "subsec:General-output"
51604 \begin_layout Description
51606 \begin_inset space ~
51609 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51611 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51613 \begin_inset space ~
51619 For a detailed description see section
51621 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51626 \begin_inset space ~
51634 \begin_layout Description
51636 \begin_inset space ~
51639 Options Options for the program
51643 that is used for the export format
51648 \begin_inset space ~
51652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51654 reference "subsec:Export"
51659 Possible options are listed in the
51664 \begin_inset Newline newline
51668 \begin_inset Flex URL
51671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51673 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51683 \begin_layout Description
51685 \begin_inset space ~
51689 \begin_inset space ~
51692 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51695 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51696 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51698 \begin_inset space ~
51704 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51707 \begin_layout Description
51709 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51711 \begin_inset space ~
51715 \begin_inset Index idx
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51725 \begin_inset Index idx
51728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51729 Settings ! Date format
51734 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51735 \begin_inset Newline newline
51739 \begin_inset Flex URL
51742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51750 \begin_inset Newline newline
51753 For example the format
51754 \begin_inset Newline newline
51758 \begin_inset Newline newline
51761 prints the date as day/month/year.
51766 \begin_layout Description
51768 \begin_inset space ~
51772 \begin_inset space ~
51775 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51776 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51779 \begin_layout Subsection
51785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51787 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51792 \begin_inset Index idx
51795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51796 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51805 \begin_layout Description
51807 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
51809 \begin_inset space ~
51817 \begin_inset space ~
51821 \begin_inset space ~
51824 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
51829 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
51850 are used for Cyrillic.
51851 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
51852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51864 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
51866 sets up in the background.
51867 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
51872 \begin_layout Description
51874 \begin_inset space ~
51878 \begin_inset space ~
51882 \begin_inset space ~
51886 \begin_inset space ~
51889 options They only have an effect when the program
51893 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
51896 \begin_layout Standard
51897 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
51898 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
51899 manuals of the applications.
51902 \begin_layout Description
51904 \begin_inset space ~
51907 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
51908 \begin_inset space ~
51912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51914 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
51921 \begin_layout Description
51923 \begin_inset space ~
51926 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
51927 \begin_inset space ~
51931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51933 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
51940 \begin_layout Description
51942 \begin_inset space ~
51945 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
51946 \begin_inset space ~
51950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51952 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
51959 \begin_layout Description
51965 \begin_inset space ~
51968 command Command for the program
51970 Check\SpecialChar TeX
51973 that is described in the section
51975 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
51980 Additional Features
51985 \begin_layout Standard
51986 There are additionally the following options:
51989 \begin_layout Description
51991 \begin_inset space ~
51995 \begin_inset space ~
51999 \begin_inset space ~
52003 \begin_inset space ~
52008 \begin_inset space ~
52011 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52029 to separate folders.
52030 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52032 \begin_inset Index idx
52035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52042 \begin_inset Index idx
52045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52054 \begin_layout Description
52056 \begin_inset space ~
52060 \begin_inset space ~
52064 \begin_inset space ~
52068 \begin_inset space ~
52072 \begin_inset space ~
52076 \begin_inset space ~
52079 changes Removes all manually set
52085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52086 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52088 \begin_inset space ~
52093 dialog when changing the document class.
52096 \begin_layout Section
52098 \begin_inset space ~
52102 \begin_inset Index idx
52105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52114 \begin_layout Subsection
52116 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52118 name "subsec:Converters"
52123 \begin_inset Index idx
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52135 \begin_layout Standard
52136 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52137 from one format to another.
52138 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52139 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52146 \begin_inset space ~
52151 field and press the
52156 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52160 \begin_inset space ~
52165 drop-down list, modify the
52169 field and press the
52176 \begin_layout Standard
52179 Converter File Cache
52185 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52187 Maximum Age (in days
52190 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52191 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52194 \begin_layout Standard
52195 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52196 definition, is described in the section
52207 \begin_layout Subsection
52209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52211 name "sec:File-Formats"
52216 \begin_inset Index idx
52219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52226 \begin_inset Index idx
52229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52238 \begin_layout Standard
52239 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52249 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52252 \begin_layout Standard
52253 You can also define the
52255 Default output format
52257 that is used when you use
52259 View, Update, View Master Document
52263 Update Master Document
52269 menu or the toolbar.
52272 \begin_layout Standard
52273 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52284 \begin_layout Standard
52285 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52287 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52288 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52289 This is done by specifying a
52294 More about this is described in the section
52305 \begin_layout Chapter
52306 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52308 \begin_inset Index idx
52311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52318 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52320 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52327 \begin_layout Standard
52329 \begin_inset space ~
52333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52335 reference "tab:Units"
52339 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52340 and used in this documentation.
52343 \begin_layout Standard
52344 \begin_inset Float table
52351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52352 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52355 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52370 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52378 \begin_inset Tabular
52379 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52380 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52381 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52382 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52383 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52429 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52466 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52532 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52536 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52697 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52701 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52775 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52807 scaled point (65536
52808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52812 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52875 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
52880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52999 % of original image width
53004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53088 \begin_layout Standard
53089 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53092 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53099 \begin_layout Bibliography
53100 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53101 LatexCommand bibitem
53108 The \SpecialChar LyX
53110 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53113 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53119 \begin_inset Newline newline
53123 \begin_inset Flex URL
53126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53128 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53136 \begin_layout Bibliography
53137 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53138 LatexCommand bibitem
53139 key "latexcompanion"
53144 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53146 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53147 Companion Second Edition.
53150 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53153 \begin_layout Bibliography
53154 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53155 LatexCommand bibitem
53161 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53164 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53168 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53171 \begin_layout Bibliography
53172 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53173 LatexCommand bibitem
53182 : A Document Preparation System.
53185 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53188 \begin_layout Bibliography
53189 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53190 LatexCommand bibitem
53200 The \SpecialChar TeX
53204 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53207 \begin_layout Bibliography
53208 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53209 LatexCommand bibitem
53215 The \SpecialChar TeX
53217 \begin_inset Newline newline
53221 \begin_inset Flex URL
53224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53226 https://ctan.org/topic
53234 \begin_layout Bibliography
53235 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53236 LatexCommand bibitem
53242 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53244 \begin_inset Newline newline
53248 \begin_inset Flex URL
53251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53253 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53261 \begin_layout Bibliography
53262 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53263 LatexCommand bibitem
53270 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53272 name "Documentation"
53273 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53280 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53284 \begin_inset Newline newline
53288 \begin_inset Flex URL
53291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53293 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53301 \begin_layout Bibliography
53302 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53303 LatexCommand bibitem
53310 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53312 name "Documentation"
53313 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53318 how to use the program
53320 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53324 \begin_inset Newline newline
53328 \begin_inset Flex URL
53331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53333 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53341 \begin_layout Bibliography
53342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53343 LatexCommand bibitem
53350 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53352 name "Documentation"
53353 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53358 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53364 \begin_inset Index idx
53367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53369 packages ! biblatex
53375 \begin_inset Newline newline
53379 \begin_inset Flex URL
53382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53384 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53392 \begin_layout Bibliography
53393 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53394 LatexCommand bibitem
53401 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53403 name "Documentation"
53404 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53409 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53415 \begin_inset Index idx
53418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53426 \begin_inset Newline newline
53430 \begin_inset Flex URL
53433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53435 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53443 \begin_layout Bibliography
53444 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53445 LatexCommand bibitem
53452 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53454 name "Documentation"
53455 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53465 \begin_inset Newline newline
53469 \begin_inset Flex URL
53472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53474 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53482 \begin_layout Bibliography
53483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53484 LatexCommand bibitem
53485 key "makeindex-man"
53491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53494 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53504 \begin_inset Newline newline
53508 \begin_inset Flex URL
53511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53513 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53521 \begin_layout Bibliography
53522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53523 LatexCommand bibitem
53530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53532 name "Documentation"
53533 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53543 \begin_inset Newline newline
53547 \begin_inset Flex URL
53550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53552 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53560 \begin_layout Bibliography
53561 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53562 LatexCommand bibitem
53569 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53571 name "Documentation"
53572 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53577 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53579 \begin_inset Newline newline
53583 \begin_inset Flex URL
53586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53588 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53596 \begin_layout Bibliography
53597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53598 LatexCommand bibitem
53605 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53607 name "Documentation"
53608 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53613 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53619 \begin_inset Index idx
53622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53630 \begin_inset Newline newline
53634 \begin_inset Flex URL
53637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53639 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53647 \begin_layout Bibliography
53648 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53649 LatexCommand bibitem
53656 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53658 name "Documentation"
53659 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53664 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53670 \begin_inset Index idx
53673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53675 packages ! enumitem
53681 \begin_inset Newline newline
53685 \begin_inset Flex URL
53688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53690 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53698 \begin_layout Bibliography
53699 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53700 LatexCommand bibitem
53707 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53709 name "Documentation"
53710 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53715 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53721 \begin_inset Index idx
53724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53726 packages ! fancyhdr
53732 \begin_inset Newline newline
53736 \begin_inset Flex URL
53739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53741 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53749 \begin_layout Bibliography
53750 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53751 LatexCommand bibitem
53758 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53760 name "Documentation"
53761 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53766 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53772 \begin_inset Index idx
53775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53777 packages ! hyperref
53783 \begin_inset Newline newline
53787 \begin_inset Flex URL
53790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53792 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53800 \begin_layout Bibliography
53801 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53802 LatexCommand bibitem
53809 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53811 name "Documentation"
53812 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
53817 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53823 \begin_inset Index idx
53826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53828 packages ! microtype
53834 \begin_inset Newline newline
53838 \begin_inset Flex URL
53841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53843 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
53851 \begin_layout Bibliography
53852 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53853 LatexCommand bibitem
53860 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53862 name "Documentation"
53863 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
53868 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53874 \begin_inset Index idx
53877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53885 \begin_inset Newline newline
53889 \begin_inset Flex URL
53892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53894 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
53902 \begin_layout Bibliography
53903 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53904 LatexCommand bibitem
53911 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53913 name "Documentation"
53914 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
53919 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53925 \begin_inset Index idx
53928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53930 packages ! prettyref
53936 \begin_inset Newline newline
53940 \begin_inset Flex URL
53943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53945 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
53953 \begin_layout Bibliography
53954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53955 LatexCommand bibitem
53962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53964 name "Documentation"
53965 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
53970 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53976 \begin_inset Index idx
53979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53981 packages ! refstyle
53987 \begin_inset Newline newline
53991 \begin_inset Flex URL
53994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53996 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54004 \begin_layout Bibliography
54005 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54006 LatexCommand bibitem
54013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54016 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54021 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54023 \begin_inset Newline newline
54027 \begin_inset Flex URL
54030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54032 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54040 \begin_layout Bibliography
54041 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54042 LatexCommand bibitem
54049 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54052 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54057 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54059 \begin_inset Newline newline
54063 \begin_inset Flex URL
54066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54068 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54076 \begin_layout Bibliography
54077 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54078 LatexCommand bibitem
54085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54088 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54093 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54094 for Cyrillic languages:
54095 \begin_inset Newline newline
54099 \begin_inset Flex URL
54102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54104 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54112 \begin_layout Bibliography
54113 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54114 LatexCommand bibitem
54121 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54124 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54129 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54131 \begin_inset Newline newline
54135 \begin_inset Flex URL
54138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54140 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54148 \begin_layout Bibliography
54149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54150 LatexCommand bibitem
54157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54160 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54165 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54167 \begin_inset Newline newline
54171 \begin_inset Flex URL
54174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54176 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54184 \begin_layout Bibliography
54185 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54186 LatexCommand bibitem
54193 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54196 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54201 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54203 \begin_inset Newline newline
54207 \begin_inset Flex URL
54210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54212 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54220 \begin_layout Standard
54221 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54255 \begin_inset Note Note
54258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54265 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54266 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54267 bibliography is the second one:
54275 \begin_layout Standard
54276 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54277 LatexCommand bibtex
54278 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54279 options "biblio/alphadin"
54286 \begin_layout Standard
54287 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54291 \begin_layout Standard
54295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54301 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54310 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54318 \begin_inset Note Note
54321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54322 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54323 \begin_inset space ~
54327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54329 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54341 \begin_layout Standard
54342 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54343 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54349 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54350 LatexCommand printindex